GC21 7608 2_System3_15_SCP_macros_reference_manual_Mar80 2 System3 15 SCP Macros Reference Manual Mar80

aaaa aaaa

aaaaaaaaaaoaa aa aaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaa aaaa aaaa

aaaa aaaa aaao

aaao aaaa -aaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaa aaaaaa

aaaa aaaa

aoaa aaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaa

a a a

a o a a a a a

a a aaa a

a a

aaaa aaaa

aaaa aaaaa

aaaaa aaaaaaa

aaaaaa aaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaa

aaaa aaaa aaaa

aoaa aaaa aaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaa aaaaa

aaaaaaaa aaaa

aaaaaa

aaaa aaaaa

aaaaa aaaaaaa

aaaaaa aaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaa

aaaa aaaa aaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaa aaaaa

aaaaaaaa aaaa

aaaaaa

IBM

System./3 Model 15

System

Control

Programming

Macros

Reference

Manual

aaaa

aaaaaaa

aaaaa

aaa aa

aaaaaaa

aaaa

aaaaaa

aaaa aaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaoaa

aaaaaaaaaaa

aaaa aa a aaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaooaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaa aaaa

GC21-7608-2

File No. 53-36

Page

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued 29 September

1978

By TNL: GN21-5649

Preface

Thismanua|describesthemacrcrinstrttcttcrtts1rtrlvic1t,ci|lisl..saiiii,i..i]i()ql;ir,|.;l-1i,'.,;\ri|l!i

the IBM System/3 Moclel 15. The publrc,riirrr:;i ir,tcnue,,j t;iiri-;

for persons

who are programrning in the iJasic

Assembler

Language

or its

equivalent

arrd who are

ianiiitdt

wiit, tirc .r ilt::.. 1'1,t,

.. , [r;-

, ,/tieri

r]i.i i),--,)t-open

DTF (Defirre

concept of macro instructions and syslr:ii lrrograrn:'niitti lnr ;:,i,.

1 ijilr,tr.il Ljlur.;ks f1,1

,srrra

rrjooir:.1

arrr{ tl

rsk

devices,

for

the IBM

Svstem/3 N4odel

15.

The

following

topics

are

discusse<l

in

thi: t-.r.rirircar;rrir F{eia

ti:rl l"ui.:ircatrt

ns

o Coding macro instructiotrs :.

.,iir;a.ai,(irri

i;,r r:;ilil

i,r1.,r

iriarrr,ril

wil!{.lir

rr:itrrci

r :.tt:;{

'i3SCr-ti;,;:.

: ,l)ir.j!

ijti.i:,r.,5,'1j

i ' r:..-r,

irldlLi.ti:

o Descriptions

of tlre

vaitous

lnacro rft:ir,,1cli(,r]:.

t ;i- i:'t l,,r5i1':;1 ,) it,:s't,,1{.t::g.',',/;if:;

i;elf:fellCe MeftUal,

a OCL necessary to call the f rracio llr{)crsi/rrr

. ,}i.-

j; /\iil

o Error conditions detected

by the rlacro i)rOccs:(ri qt i5ltli

,.:,,,,stx;i::J

frts:it:! 1i.

iiystel; (',ntroi Frogrammtng

iitJi:i;'t::::: 4,!art*al

li:. Pr,,'j;

arii

i\lrr;cer

5704

Si,1 .

t:'.'2 1-'Lt)'i I

t !!:!i/l :)v

j!-,,.)!t ::

lvlr:Jt'i .:\ .','r''\refi)

l.of:trt:l Pfoglratntning

Ct;rt: ','.'t;is

atrt! f-le:r.:rutr:,t

ltllanuai i.i, P1691ut Nirrnbel.

3 / !

)) :,i.

,

j i-r

{l:.r

'1 :, i { i:l

Third

Edition

(December

1976)

This is

a major revision

of

,

and obsolCtes,

GCl2l

-1608 I arrr;

't'-'c!irriLiii

l\.i-o!!\ieli1

!:i

GN21-5353 and GN21-5432. Inf ornration has

bcen a{ld.r,j

r,r

:iuL'p,i

I SCir

57O4-SC2 as well as SCP 57O4-SC1. Changes

to 1.,:,{1

,r,iri

r'r(,,ri'ti iins ..rr1:

'frilli

'rrrr

by a vertical line.

This edition applies to ver sior' f,Js,

mt.)lcrf irat orr 00 ol Jlrir

ii-ii.V

$y:ti-,rr.j fulor,],.r

':,

SystetnControl

Program5704-SCl,toversic)rrOl.rr;cciiirirti,rr;COr:1

trti'ii\i'll

Systeml3 Model 15 System Control Progranr

57O4 SC:l .r'rri

lr;,rli 5\rl]!equii,:r

versions

and modifications until otherwrse

ir'drcJted

rrlr"!'!,'{rrir.,r.,

:r Teci,

r,r.,,'

newslette

rs.

Changes

are periodically ntade to tirrr

Jpccil ic;)tions ftrr':ir' i)e

j

r:

r': uirril i

iii:

publicarion in connection wittr t!re

operation cl !8fui

:,;',rr:',r,: J,i!i.)ri

r'ii'

IBM System/3 Bibliography, {.-rC2O'BliSti-

ior Tt, Ljrl-i.r:r,i

: ,i ri

i.aiJI.):i.r.irl

and current.

Use this publication only ior the ltliri)oses

stalfj(l ilr ti:t .,, ,,,,

Publicalions are not stocke(j at the address

L.liUw [:ldrr,i,,\1:;

i{)i {.,-jr

j, ..

jr !Ui\l:

:,!jl)r,

cations

and for technical information about ttre syslein ,irorirrj

'irir

frr:r{.lij

r,.

!..rri iilliri

representattve Or tO the branch olfice servinll V.rur ti)0airi

!

This publication coultJ

contarn techiiical

inacr.ur,,rcre:.li

irtli:rjrfl,nrj.ijr,rrfi-):, ,:t,i.

Reader's

Comment Form at the back of this pul:lri:att(l1t

!.) ffl:tirc i)ir,i|,,,,ri

itl.)i,.,,

this publication. lf the form has

been retniuvuri,

arjdrer: ,yr.;r;r

: i,.irrl:rf

,i, tl ril\il

Corporation, Publicatrons, Department 245, Uochester. ,\linrrri(.,i.r ij5:l,J; !r:ii,,l

:ir,:jv rjrril

arrd

disr.

,bute anv of the informal-ioit

you jul-!pi,/

in aiiy wav rt betrevc5

rr;:,l1iiji).riiir.

without Incurrirlg

any obligation whaicver. You rn.::y, r..,i

io!ir5c. coriiiTru, t! ir:,.,

,,'"

inf

ormation you supplV.

O Copyright International

Business

Machines

Corpor,:1r,;,.

;t/'l tti:i!r.

i,j./rj

CHAPTER

1: TNTRODUCTTON

Writing

Macro

I

nstructions

System

Configuration

Macro Instructions

Provideo

CHAPTER

2: MACRO INSiRUCTION STATEMENTS

Programming

Considerations

System

Services Macros

System Reader

Support

System

Log

Support

General

SCP

Support

Input/Output Support

General l/O Support

Card Device

Supporl

Printer

Support

Disk Device

Support

3741 Device

Support

Tape Device

Supporr

Device Independent

gupporr

CRT/Keyboard

Display

Support

Program

Function

Key Support

Contents

CHAPTER

3: OCL

AND SAMPLE

PROGRAM

OCL for Macro Processor

Sample

Program

.

Purpose

of the Sample Program

Termination

of the

sample

Program

Macro Instructions

Used

in the

Sample

program

APPENDIX

A: ERROR

INFORMATTON

APPENDIX

B: DEFINE

THE FtLE

CONTROL

BLOCKS

APPENDIX

C: INPUT/OUTPUT

BLOCKS 106

Disk

Input/Output

Block 106

Timer

Input/Output

Block . 11 1

APPENDIX

D: MACRO INSTRUCTION

SUMMARY

CHART

I

4

1

7

o

I

12

22

28

33

?q

48

49

5b

58

61

63

66

67

68

INDEX

112

119

A macro

instruction

is

a source

statement

that

causes

generation

of a

predetermined

set

of assembler

statements

each

time

the macro

instruction

is

used.

The

Model

1b

Svstem

Control

Program

provides

macro

instructions

which

oer-

form

both

system

services

and

input/output

device

support.

By

using

these

macro

instructions,

you

can

perform

both

system

and input/output

operations

with less

coding.

Figure

1 is

an overview

of the

operation

of

the macro

processor.

The

OCL

statements

used

to call

the

macro

processor

are

explained

in Chapter

3: OCL

and

Sample

Program.

WR

ITING MACRO

INSTRUCTIONS

You

code macro

instructions

as

follows:

Start i ng

Column

1

Name Operation Operands Continuation

Symbol

or

blank Macro

na

me No operands

or one or more

separated

by

coTl mas

Any nonblank

character

if

continuation

is

being used

The

name field

can

contain

any valid

assembler

language

symbolic

name

beginning

in

column 1. The

name

is

assigned

to the first byte of generated

code. Since rne name

is

optional,

it is

shown

enclosed

in

brackets.

The

desired mnemonic

operation

code

(macro

instruction

name)

must

appear

as specified

in

the macro

instruction

description.

The

operation

code must

start in

column

g.

Operand

Chapter

1 : Introduction

Operands

specify

the

available

services

and

options. The

operands

must start in column 14, and

are written as

follows:

. Each

operand

consists

of a keyword followed bv a dash

and

a

parameter.

o Commas

separate

the

operands;

no blanks

should

be

left between

operands.

o Keywords

- those

shown in capital

letters

- are coded

exactly as shown. The keyword part of each

operand

must correspond

to one of the keywords in tne macro

instruction

description.

. The parameter

part of the operand must immediately

follow

the dash.

Parameters

- those

shown in lowercase

letters

- indicate

information you must

supply. Some

operands

are not

required.

These

optional

operands

are

indicated

by

enclosing

the

operand

within brackets

IKEyWORD-

parameterl

.

An option list for a keyword parameter

is

specified

as

follows:

KEYWORD-A/B/C

This

list indicates

that the keyword

has

the

options

A, B, or C. These

are the

only valid

options

for the

keyword parameter.

When

the options

Y/N are

given

in

a macro

instruction.

Y indicates

a yes

response,

N indicates

a no response.

The

operands

may

be

written in

any

order. lf a

xey

word is not specified,

the default

value

is used.

A

default value

is selected for optional keywords

that are

omitted. The

default

value

is indicated

in

the macro

instruction

description

by a line

under

the

default

option.

For

example,

IKEY-A/B/C] indicates

the option

A is

the default

value.

72

o

Optional Default

Operand Value Option

List

Keyword

NAM E-module

[,F

tN Dladd'ressj

LPACK

-,

I

ntroduction

This

is

your program.

It includes

macro

statements.

Load

the macro

processor

($MPXDV).

OCL can be entered

through

the

system

input device or called

f

rom

the

procedure

library.

Statements

placed

in

y'

$SOURCE are used

as

source

input

to an

assembler.

Figure

1. Macro

Processor

Overview

z

----l / x*

-\_

a \-: Ihis indicates

the

begirrrring

,

\ ofthenextjob.

\-This indicates

the end

of your

job.

IBM

System/3 Model

15

Macro

Processor

(gMPXDV)

The macro processor

reads

source

state-

ments f

ronr

either

the system

input de-

vice or a source

librarv.

All valid

assembler

statements

and

comments

are

placed

in

$SOU

RCE.

Macro

statements

are listed

in

$SOURCE,

preceded

by

an

asterisk

and

followed

by the

macro

expanston.

Macro

expansion

statements

are

marked

(by

the macro

processor)

in

position

96 in

gSOI.JRCE

and indi-

cated

on the

assembly listing

by a

plus

sign

(+)

preceding

the

expan-

sioq statement.

Invalid

statements

are

flagged

and

placed

in

$SOURCE.

No opefatt'.i:,

r;.rit

[]" l;;,u,.;iltr:ri

i)r..r,,i.,1(t

r.olrJr,,rr

,r

I !i r:,,i,

tinUati\)n is rr:quiretl,

c.)liliitir'/2 ,nrist a:(rt-r'1.:ri,

.,

:ru;,l.,la:,li

Chal'dCler

attd

ilie ia:{ uyr,,,.rr,rt,rri,rt

i}(;

l,li.'r.i:.;r;

i ir.:

COmll.Ia An ,-;1i,lr;'lii

{:afriti

i i,c ri:i

(tt,ri ri,rr

rrrl;littr!tt{l

!)it

[he ric.<1

lirlt' I

llu t)t:i:r.:1,rr,t\)

r)i ]lr,'f}r,i!,'.rr:ll l!l-.iil

titlrsi

begin in colilinn l4- For i1l| e)(ir;,tirir ,)f i;\)||itntt.rlitrttr

(]aliilU.

see

Figure 2.

C0rlrrttents i'lrtsl

brj sepaini.ed iti.,r,r

t!

r,; .,r,utd,

(;

ilr {

j(

fiti.rla

by at least

Li)]e l)iitrlk

S[;.1r

L] a;(), irii(;iii.,

:,,-itii-ioi

1.,i, ;rrsrlilru

fietwggtt otrtlraircis

{Jri

d '-ilri

ltttu iida.rrr

lrr:_it

tr;.,i)rr.

FllqiJrC

3 si'rorrus

eXampl€r

1)t

riotitltJ!,t: Lit,r:(J

wrIl] tirrrij;i:

ritsrili,.l

tiorls. Ofl tile

assentl.'ier lastitlg,

a!i corir{il{iril!

o.r;1,,'

geilL'ratri(j

c(,ijC

tlte

lil5tiilrtii

i.)\/

tiitj tir.li;fr-,

llr(jr.ij:ri)!

tiJ

[-reqit; ir tjoldtilil

4fi. Arr / i.(]ltrilt(,,.it:

r,rI liiirrl !u l)e

tji)t]-

tei'itiJ

itt

COIUn)!rs4{J

ritriil

.Jir

/i diii ttrrrii:;

,,r;

t irir, tir,j

rigr

]

i.

',, l

I

16s

lul

K"5

"i-lo

tsY-

.tf].

ii

ri

1f

ii

r1

I

i1

rl

F ir,jur€

2 U.

F igu;e ,l

lntroductiorr 3

SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION

The

minimunt

system

configuration

for using

the

Model

15

macros

is:

5415 Processing

Unit

with at least

4gK bytes

of main

srorage.

3277 Display

Station Model 1 with Feature

4632.

This

comprises

the IBM

System/3

Model

15

CRT/Key

board,

usually

referred

to in

this

manual

as the

CRT/

Keyboard.

Disk

Storage

Device.

A system

input

device.

o

l.

o

. 1403 Printer

Model

2,

5, or N1.

The

following

input

and

output

devices

are

supported:

. 5424

Multi-Function

Card

Unit

(MFCU)

Model

A1

or

A.2,1442

Card

Read

punch

Model

6

or Model

7,

or

2560

Multi-Function

Card

Machine

(MFCM)

Model

A1

or 42.

. 1403 Printer

Model

2,

5,

or N1.

. 3277

Display

Station Model

1

with Feature

Number

4632

(CRT/Keyboard).

This

device

can

be

used

both

as the

system

input

device

and

the

system

log

device.

. 3410/3411

Magnetic

Tape

Subsystem

Model

1,2,

or

3.

o 2501

Card

Reader

Model

A1 or Model

A2

3284 Printer

3741

Dala

Station

Model

1 or Z

or progranrmahle

Wor-k

Station

Model

3 or 4.

Disk

Storage

Requirements.

'Mutually

exclusive

The macro

processor

operates under

coirtrol

of the lBlVl

System/3

Model 15 Systeni

Control Program.

MACRO

INSTRUCTIONS

PROVIDED

The macro

instructions

provided

by the Model

1b System

Control Program

(SCP)

and the

functions

they

perform

are

shown

in Figure

4.

All maoos

you want to use must

be in

the source library

orr

the prograrn

pack

or the system

pack.

The progiam pack is

the disk pack

f

rorrr in"rhich

the macro

processor

is

loacjed.

The

system

pack

is

thc disk

pack

frorn

which

irirtial

prografir

load

(lPL) is

performeC.

l{ote

that the macro

processor

anct

lP[-

corle may

be on thc

same

pack.

You may

want

to cle lete

sonre rlracro

instrucircris

lionr

your library

to reduce

tfit,

amouirt of tlisk space

requirer_l

for the

rnacro

instructions.

For.

instarrce,

if your

system

does

not include

the 34 iili34 l1 Magrretic

1-ape

Subsysttrrrr.

the tape macro inslruclions

vyoult.l

be

of nr_,

use to yor_t.

You can delete macro

llslr.ul:tiolls

frilni

your lit:r

ari b,,,

using

the library

mainterrancie

titiliry

program,

$MAlNl-.

a

5704

scl I SC2

Minimum l--rsaT-rse i-,sc*T*,sD

5444DiskStoraseDrive, I x | | f_-

ModerA2 | I i

334CDirectAccessStorase

| | X I X I X

Facii,ty.

Model

A2 I

Optional I

5444 Disk

Storage

Drive, I X

Model

A3

5445 Disk

Storage, Ir/odels

1,1 X

Moclel 42

2,and3 I I I i

3340DirectAccessStora-r;e

i I X i X I Xl

Facility,

Models

81

and 82 | | | |

3344DirectAccessStorase,

| | I I x'

Device

Type Supported

System

Reacier $RLST

$R

LSD

$READ

System

Log $LWTO

SLIVISG

$LOG

$L

OGD

Gerreral

SCP $ROLL

$FI

ND

$LOAD

SFTCH

$XCTL

$TR

L

btr{ttJ

$TRAN

$SNAP

SDATE

STIOB

$SiT

STOD

$R

tT

$EOJ

Generate

reader

parameter

list

Off sets in reader

parameter

list

Linkage

to system

reader

Generate

parameter

list for WTO

or WTOR

Genefate

parameter

list for halt message

on system

Iog

Linkage

to system log

Offsets in log

parameter

list

Rollout/rollin

linkage

(5704-SCi

Only)

Find

a

directory

entry

Load

a

module

Load a module

and

pass

control

Lr:ad

a

module

and exchange

control

Generate

a translate

parameter

list

Generate a translate

table

Generate

an

interface

to the translate routine

Snap dump main

storage

Retrieve

system date

Generate

timer IOB

Set interval

timer

Return

time

of day

and system date

Return

amount

of time left in

timer interval

End

of

job

General

l/O $ALOC

$OPEN

$CI<

L

$CH

K

$CLOS

$DTFO

$COMN

$DTFC

$GETC

$PUTC

$GPC

Define the

Construct

Con struct

Allocate

disk

space or device

Prepare

an l/O device

Generate

a checkl ist

Clreck for l/O completion for BSCA operations

Prepar

e a device for

termination

DTF offsets

for all

devices

Generate

equates

f ile for a card device

a card

GET interface

a card

PUT interface

a GET or

a

PUT interface

to a card

f

ile

Figure

4 (Part

1 of 2). Macro Instructions

I ntrod ucti on

-."*"**--T-

Device

fype Supported

Printr:

r

D isl<

Device

Independent

(l

R T/l(ev

boai

d

3741

Frgure

4 (Part

2 of ?). Macro Instructtons

I

nstr

riction

Niriire

$D

TFP

$PU TP

$DTFt)

$GE

It)

$PUTI)

$r(]Bf)

$IOED

$RDi)

$WR

TD

$WAIT

$DTFI

$GF-f

t

SPUI

I

$RDT

$WRff

$CI

LT

$wil

$D-rF

I

$GETI

$PU

TI

i titrr:1ir',,

i),:rfin

' :l! i;j{.

{ )L

(lort5ii

trirt

I i,r

i,rfe

,,1c-;

frr.r)

tltor-i:rr r.

t-l

irl,.t--[ ;r,r

riiii

i)ei'lrre

.r ligyjr'3

11,1j,'1;1)rr.iFlrrt

ftle

(lt',rrstr;r.t

a l('vir-p

iIrrlr.)prr:y11!o111

GF'i rIrtet.face

I

:rri

l,:r' i

;

r:'t

:1

i

iovir-p

it

tdat,erri

l:,ri1

!)1..1-f

interface

il,'l,r;.

:lrr' ,

;,. ir: ijfr'I

lli:|]1;ittr.'r

I

:r,virnlt,i rli. I ;itt.,,l:la.r

i::.,cii

j ,r,

llfl!l:!Jl rr,ipr

:r-

I$D

I

trs

$GEIS

$PLr

rs

$PGS

SCOEP

$PF

t<Y

$PI

i<l

$[]rrK

$GE

TK

$PU

TK

,

r:.lr.reijt

to C RT/l{e',' ltoal I

a nIi)/.I-arn

ILrric'tion

key request

lriots,,rl

i

l.'I,r,.,

:i, irr l,

, 1,.,,

l

(:ilrlstr(,i,

r a,Ji/l'l {:tl: l trrteri'acp

:

rr

r;1r,,

I i4| i'lit,lr'

"L{'.,

I

J

Chapter 2. Macro lnstruction Statements

You code macro

instructionsto

generate

a block of 2. The

code

generated

by the

macros

is

assigned

labers,

assembler

statements

that perform

a certain

function. Some which

begin with the dollar

sign

($). To avoid

dupli

functions

may

be the

same each

time they are used,

others cate label

errors,

you should

not use the dollar sign

may

be modified

by specifying

different operands.

This as the

first

character of a label.

chapter explains

the

Svstem/3 Model

15

macro

instructions

in

detail.

SYSTEM SERVICES

MACROS

The macro

instructions

are

grouped

in

this chapter

accord-

ing

to the

functions

they

perform: By

using

system services

macro

instructions,

you can com-

municate

with the

Model

15 system control

program.

o System

services

These macro instructions can do the

followinq:

. Input/output

support

o Read records from the svstem

input device.

Input/output

support macro instructions

are

further

divided

according

to the device

supported. o Log and

write error

messages.

PROGRAMMING

CONSIDERATIONS

When

you use

the macro

processor

you should

remember

the following

restrictions:

1. The

generated

code

for some macro instructions

uses

o Determine the location of an object

module on disk.

. Obtain object

modules

f

rom disk and

load

them into

marn

storage.

o Pass

control to modules in

main

storage.

register

1;

the

generated

code for other macro

instruc- a Terminate the current

job.

tions

uses register

2. You should

save the contents of

the

register

used by the

generated

code before issuing The system services

macro instructions are

divided into

the

macro instruction;

otherwise,

the contents

are three

groups:

destroyed. These

macro

instructions use register

1

:

1. System reader

macro instructions,

which

provide

support

and linkage to

the system

reader function.

$R

EAD

$R

LSD

$R

LST

2. System

log macro instructions,

which

provide

support

and

linkage to system

log

functions.

$LMSG

$LOG

$LOGD

$LWTO

$PFKY

$PFKT

$RDD

$TRAN

$WAIT

$WRTD

These

macro instructions

use register 2:

$ALOC $GETT $PUTS

$CHK $GPC $PUTT

$CLOS $LOAD $RDT

$CTLT $LOG $READ

$DATE $OPEN $R

IT

$FIND $PGS $SIT

$FTCH $PUTC $TOD

$GETC $PUTD $WRTT

$GETD $PUTI $WTT

$GETI $PUTK $XCTL

$GETK $PUTP

$GETS Macro lnstruction Statements I

Page

of GC21-7608-2

lssued 28 March 1980

By TNL: GN21-5700

3. General

SCP

macro

instructions,

which

provide

linkage

to system

functions.

$DATE

$EOJ

$FIND

$FTCH

$LOAD

$ROLL

(5704-SC1

only)

$R

IT

$SIT

SSNAP

$TIOB

STRAN

$TR

L

$TRTB

$TOD

$XCTL

System Reader

Support

You

read

a record from

the

system reader

by

calling

the

system reader

routine

through

the

$READ

macro

instruc

tion. The

system

reader

may

be

one of

the followirrg:

CRT/Keyboard.

Only

96-byte,

single-buffered

input

is

allowed for

this device.

Double

buf fering

is ignored.

2501

Card

Reader.

Single

and double

buffering

are

supported.

Only

B0 bytes

of the

g6-byte

buffer

are

used

as

input;

the remaining

16 bytes

are

cleared

to

bl an ks.

2560

Multi-Function

Card

Machine

(MFCM).

Single

and

double

buffering

are

supported.

Only

80 bytes

of the

96-byte

buffer

are used

as input;

the remaining

16

bytes

are

cleared

to blanks.

Support for both the

primary

(MFCM)

and secondary

(MFCM2)

hoppers

is

provided.

'1442

Card Read Punch.

Single

and

double

buffering

are

supported.

Only

B0 bytes of the

96-byte

buffer

are used

as input;

the remaining

16 bytes

are

cleared

to blanks.

5424

Multi-Function

Card

Unit (MFCU). Both single

and

double

buffering

are

supported.

Support for both

the

primary (l\4FCU1)

arrd

secondary

(MFCU2)

hoppers

is

provided.

All 96 bytes

are used

as input.

Directly

attached

3741 Data

Station Model

1

or 2 or

Programmable

Work

Station

Model

3 or 4. Single

and

double

buffering

are

supported.

Only

96-byte records

may

be read.

To call the

system reader,

you

must do

the

following:

1. Use

the

SRLST

macro

to construct

a

parameter

ltst

as

ilrput

to the

system

reader

routine.

2. Use the

SRLSD

macro

instruction to establish erluates

f

or

the system reader

parameter

list.

3. lssue

thr.

SREAD

macro

instruclrorr.

The

$R

EAD macro

generates

the

code to load

the

parameter

list

address into register

2,

set the operation

code,

call the

system reader routine,

and check

the

return

codes.

Because

the return

code is in

the same

byte as the

operatton

cooe,

the

operation cocle must

be reset

before each

call. The

$R

LSD macro is

provided

to generate

the offsets into

the

parameter

list,

the

values

for the

operation

codes, and the

values for

the

return

codes.

Generate a System Reader

Parameter List ($R LST)

This macro instruction

generates

a reader

parameter

list.

The

format

of the

SR

LST

macro

instruction

is:

N.rnr"ll

SRLST

I BUFl

arldress,WORK

addressl,BUF2

addressl

BUF |

-address

specif ies the address of tlre leftmost byte of

a 96-byte

buffer that is

aligned on a 128-byte

boundary.

This

operand is require<.t.

WORK-address

specifies

the address

of the leftmost byte of

a

47-byIe

work area;

this operand

is required.

BUF2-address

specifies the address of the leftmost byte of

a 96-byte

buffer that is

aligned on a 128-byte

boundary.

This

is the

second buffer if

double buffering is

used; if

this

operand is not

specified,

single buffering is

assumed.

System Reader Parameter List Offsets ($RLSD)

This macro

instruction

generates

a list

of equates

used

to

label the f ields

in

the system reader

parameter

list. $R

LSD

also

generates

the operation

codes and return

codes

usecl

by

$READ. To

avoid duplicate

labels,

you

should use

this

macro

instruction

only once in

a

program.

The

format

of the

$RLSD macro instruction

is:

o

Linkage to System Reader Function ($READ)

This macro

instruction

generates

the linkage

to call

the

system reader function and check for return codes.

The format of the $READ macro instruction is:

INamel

| $READI ILIST-address] [,OPC-code]

[,EOF-addressJ

[,EOJ-address] [,ERR-addressl

LlST-address

specifies the address of the leftmost

byte

of

the system reader

parameter

list. lf this operand is not

specified,

the

address of the

parameter

list is

assumed

to be

in register

2.

OPC-code

specifies the operation

code

for

this

read

request.

The allowable

codes and their meanings

are:

Meaning

Set

the

operation code

to read

one

record

from

the system reader

single buffer.

Set

the

operation

code to read one record

from

the

system

reader

into buffer

1 and

start a read on

buffer 2.

Set

the operation

code to wait

on buffer 2.

switch the

buffers, and start the

other

buffer.

Set the

operat,-,,

-ode to wait

on bulfer 2,

and switch the buffers; do

not

start the

other buffer.

N Do not set any operation code. lf this value

is specified, it is

your responsibility

to set

the

operation

code before

issuing

this macro.

The default

value for this operand is RD.

EOF-address

specifies the address in your program that re-

ceives control when an

end-of-file

statement

(l* . l&. or /.1

is detected. lf this operand is not supplied.

no code is

gen-

erated to check

for the end-of-file

condition.

EOJ-address

specifies

the address of the routine that should

get

control

if an

end-of-job or end-of-step statement

(/& or

/.)

was

detected

on the

operand is

not

specified. the test

for the return code is not generated.

Once a

/& statement

is read

from

the system reader,

nothing

can be read

from

the

system reader

until

the

end of step.

Once

a

/ . statement

is read

from

the system

reader, nothing

can be read

from

the

system reader

until the end of job.

ERR-address supplies the address

irr

your program

where

control

is

passed

if the controlled

cancel option

is taken in

response to a

permanent

l/O

error. lf this

operand

is omit-

ted.

no code

is

generated

to check

for the controlled

cancel

completion code.

Notes:

1. lf ERR

or EOF

addresses are

not specified,

you

should

check the

return

code in

your

program

to determine the

outcome

of the operation.

2. When

double buffering

is used, return

code should

be

provided

to return

to the read macro instruction until

end-of-file

(EOF)

is received. When the

program's

EOF

is dependent upon a user-defined

EOF

statement, the

last request

to the

read macro

should

be a wait only call;

this will allow all outstanding

read requests to be cleared

from

the device

queues.

The last wait

request is necessary

to prevent

overlaying the system

input work area

before

the

program

reaches end of job.

System Log Support

Specifying

a

$LOG

macro

instruction

in

your program

gen-

erates

a

call

to system log

(system

log is

a

group

of system

output

routines

which

provide

communication with the

operator).

You

may want to use

system log to notify

the

operator of error conditions, error

recovery

procedures,

and

the validity

of previous

operator responses to messages.

lf the operator selects an

invalid option in response to a

message.

the response is not accepted

by system

log.

Instead,

another

message

is

issued to the operator

until a

correct option is taken.

y'Vofe.'

When

an

immediate cancel

(option

3) is selected,

control

is

passed

directly to the end-of-job

(EOJ)

routine

by system

log.

Two

types of printed

output are available through

system

log

- logs

and

messages. Both

are

printed

on the

system

log device.

o A log is a

four-

or

six-character

statement that

identifies

the type and source

of an

error.

. A messge

is

a

printed

statement

which can

be used to

indicate

errors that

have

occurred

or to issue instructions

to the operator, such

as

requesting that a disk

file be

placed

on

a certain

drive.

Logs and

messages can be

issued with or without being

displayed

on the 3277.

Three devices can be

used as the system

log device: the

1403

printer,

the

3284

printer,

or the CRT/Keyboard.

You can change devices

by entering a LOG

statement

in

your

job

stream.

Code

RD

RDF

RDD

RDL

Macro Instruction

Statements I

To use

system log,

you

must

do

the

following:

1. Build

the log

parameter

list

using

the

$LWTO or

$LMSG

macro.

2. Use

the

$LOGD

macro

instruction

to

establish

equates

for

the log

parameter

list.

3. lssue

the macro

instruction:

INamel

| $t-oc | [rtst-"oa.ess]

[,opN0-address]

[,OPN1

-address]

[,OPN2-address]

4. Process

the operator,s

reply in your program.

Two types

of messages

can

be

displayed

on the log: the

system

message

and

the message

to the operator.

The $LMSG macro instruction

generates

a parameter

list

to

display

the standard

system

message.

you can

also

include

from 1

to 107

characters

of text with this message.

The

operator

can respond

to this message

by pressing

the pF12

key,

taking

one

of the four allowable

options,

then

pressing

ENTER. Option

0. 1,

or 2 is returned

to you for checking;

option 3 means

end-of-job. lf the operator

takes

option 3,

the system

log routine

goes

directly to the end-of-job.

The $LWTO macro instruction

generates

a parameter

list

to

display

a message

to the operator. This message

is from 1

to 107 characters

long

and is

prefixed

with six characters

which

you specify

using

the

$LWTO macro. you can

re_

quest

a reply (1 to 72 characters)

from the operator,

but if

no reply is

requested.

the operator

responds

to the messaqe

by pressing

PF12,

then ENTER.

For either

of the message

types,

the $LOGD macro instruc_

tion is

specified

to generate

offsets

into the parameter

list

and

to define

the

meaning

of the fields

within

the

parameter

I ist.

Text Length Considerations.. Message

text is displayed on

the CRT in one,

two, or three

36-character

lines.

depend_

ing

on the text length. For example,

if the text length

is

60 characters,

it takes

one line

of 36 characters

and 24 char_

acters from the second

line

to display

the message.

Reply Length Considerations Three, 36-character lines (107

characters

plus

the CRT control character)

are available

for

the message

and reply. The number of characters

allowed

for the

reply

depends

on the number

of lines

that contain

test

characters.

Once

a test

character

has

been

entered

on

a line,

any non-text

positions

of that line

cannot

be used

for a reply. Instead,

the reply

must

begin

on the next

line.

lf the

third line

contains

a text character,

no reply

can

be

made. For

example:

lf the

text length

is:

more

than 1 character

but less

than

36

more

than 36 characters

but less

than 72

more

than 72 characters no reply can

be made

but less

than 108

Generate a Parameter List for WTO or WTOR ($LWTO)

This

macro

instruction

generates

a system

log

parameter

list

for the write-to-operator

or write-to-operator-with-reply

function.

The format of the $LWTO macro instruction is:

lNamel

| $LWTO

I TLEN-number,

TADR-address

[,COMp-code]

[,HALT-code]

[,SUBH-code]

[,REPLY-Y/N]

[,RLEN-number]

[,RADR-address]

TLEN-number specifies

the text message

length (an

un-

signed,

non-zero,

decimal

value).

This

operand

is required

and

can

be

from 1

to 107

characters

lonq.

TADR-address

specif ies

the address

of the leftmost bvte of

the text message;

this operand

is required.

COMP-code

specifies

the first two characters

of the halt

message.

These

characters

are the component identification.

lf this

operand

is not specif ied,

the default

value

is

two

blanks.

HALT-code specif

ies the second

two characters

of the halt

message

- the halt

identification.

lf this operand

is

not

specified,

the default

value

is two blanks.

SUBH-code

specifies

the last

two characters

of the halt

message

* the subhalt

identif

ication. lf this

operand

is not

specified,

the default value

is

two blanks.

The reply length can be:

from 1

to 72 characters

from 1 to 36 characters

REPLY-Y or /i/

specif

ies whether

or not a

reply

is

requestecj. COIWP-t:ocle

specif

ies the

f irst

two (rlrara{;l.ets

of ltre

rnessirq{l

lf Y (yes)

is specified, system

l1-c1 waits

for the operat()r

to the cornpr;nenI

dr.scriDlii)rr

{CC) lt rhi5 o1.'er;rnLl

ts

tt,'r

reply. lf l\ (no)

is

spet;ified

ot if this operand is Lrmittecl, rro sper:iri6111,

{wrr

blarrk:;

arc irssuttteci.

reply is

allowed.

RLEN-numbel is

tlre

lerrgth

of the

reply

(an

unsigned, non-

zero, decirnal value, frorn 1 Ic:721

. lf REPLY

Y is

specif

ieci,

th is operand is

regu

ired.

RADR-address

specif

ies the aridress

of the leftmost byte of

the reply

area.

lf R EPI-Y Y is

specif

ied, this operand is

requ i red.

I Gerterate a Paraftteter List for Message on Systern

Log

($LMSG

)

This

macro instruction

qenerates

a systenr log

paranteter

list for a

log and/or

message

to the operator .

The

format of the

$LMSG macro

instruction is:

lNamel

I SLMS(j

I IFOnMAT codr'l

[,CONlP.corlel

[,1]At-l-

rtrlel [,StJUH-code]

I,SEV

cocle

j

[,DEF'code]

L,OPNO'Y/Nl

l.OPN1

Y/Nl

[,OPN2

Y/N] I,OPN3-Y/Nl

[Tt-EN'nurnberl

[,

fADF] adclressl

FORMAT-code specif

ies the type and length of the system

log

parameter

list. The

valid

code

values

and their

rneanittg

follow:

Code Length of List Format of List

l!.4L

i tode speciiies

the seconci

rwo

cttaractcts oi i.ltc

rnessage

--

the

rnessage identification

(['ll"t).

lf tlrrs

,.)l)i'r

,]r(i

is

not specif ied,

two blanks

are assurrteci-

SUBII

code

specif

ies

the

last two cllaracters

rrl

ttle

nrestit(le

rhe sr-rtrttalt

iderrtif

ication

(ll). lf FOtlltlAT il 'rr

f

l

was specifiecl and

tlris

operand

is otrtittr:d, ivuo

l.'lattkl

atr:

assumed

"

SEV-code specilies

the severity

which conditions

tlte selec'

tion

r'lf

the

default

(DEF)

option

opetanti

Tltis etttrv

cor'

responrls to the severity

code entry

in tne NOFIAL. i stalt:

ment.

lf the severity code

specif

led irt tlre

NOH/\L-I i;tate

ment is less than the

value specified

in this entry,

tlle halt

wi | | be issried.

Val id etrtries

(f

rorlt lowerst to

lrighest'r)vrrI

I

ii

I

are

1,2,

11,

arrd 8. lf tlris operancl

is

orlitted,

a severity

of

B is assumed-

DEF code specif

ies

tlte

clef aull

optiort

to 'jeleot

vvlloll

e)(()orrI

inq

In un.lttended

mode-

Valid

erltries are

N, [J,

'l

,2, arrrJ

3; it rhis opr:ronr-l

rs rrot slrecified,

N (norrc)

is asst.ttreri.

OPN0-y'/N specifies

whether

option

0 is all"rwr:d.

lf Y

{yes)

is enlefed" optiort

0 is allowed;

if l',1

(rroi

is

trtrlutecl

ot

it this optlrarrd

is

lrrritteri, oJrtiort

0 is not allowt:rl-

OPNI Y/N specif

ics wheiht:r

option 1 is allowecl . l{ Y i.r

entered, ct1-rtion

1

is

allowed;if

lJ

(no)

is i:trteterl or

iJ

tlri',

opr:rand

is ornitted

option I is not allowed^

L)PN2-Y/N si.'ecifres

wfrether

option

2 is allovvr:tl.

l{ Y

(yes)

is

eltTered, option

2 is

allowed;

if N (rio)

is eoiertrrl'rr

if this cperarid

is clrnitted,

()i)ti(lrr

2 is rtnt

;llr''wr:ri

OPN3 Y/N specif

ies

whether

optiorr

3 ts allowed. lt Y (vcs)

is sprrcified,

option 3 is

allc'wed;

ii N (no)

is sl>ecifieci

'tr it

this

oJreranrl

is ornitted,

optiol-l

3 is rrot;rilov;t"i

lv(lfrr. lf ti1:litttl 3 is allowed.

c()!l1r(-)l

vvill

tt'rt

ltil i'lrtl

lit)rl

to youl proqrallrl.

A 7

bytes

B 9 bytes

C 10 bytes

D 1 2 bytes

where: F

and

D are

flag

bytes

CC

is the component

lD

I'lll is the nressage lD

O is

the

option

irrdicator

(this

is deternrined

by the

settings

of operands

OPN0, OPN 1,

OPN2,

and OPN3)

ll is the sub-halt

lD

L is

the lerrgth

of the

text

AA is the address of the text

lf this operand

is

ornitted,

FORMAT B is assunred.

FDCCHH(J

FDCCI.IHOII

FDCCHIIOI-AA

FDCCHHOIILAA

Macro Instructioll Slaterndllts I 1

TLEN-number

specifies

the

text length.

This

entry (L),

vvhich

is

a decimal

entry

fr.crn

1

to 1O7,

is requirecl

if

FORMAT

C or

D is

specified.

TADB-address

specif

ies

the leftmost byte of the rext

address.

This

operand

(AA) is required

if FORMAT_C

or D

is

specified.

Generate

the Linkage to the System LoS $LOG)

This

macro

instruction

generates

the linkage

required

to use

the

system

log furrction,

and

checks

the response

returned.

The

$LOGD macro

instruction

must

be usecl

with this

macro

instruction,

to establish

offsets

in

the

system

rog

parameter

list.

lf you will need

to use

the

data in register

2 at a later

time,

you should

save

the

contents

of that register

before

issuing

the

$LOG

macro

inslruction.

The

format

of the

$LOG macro

instruction

is:

INamel

I gi

66 | lt tst-rdo'.rsl

t.opNo-adciressl

[.OPN1'addressl [,OPN2-adrJress]

L|ST-address

specifies

the address

of the leftmost bvte of

the

system

log

parameter

list. lf this

operand

is not specl_

fied,

the address

of the

parameter

list

is

assumed

to be in

register

2.

OPNO-address

specif ies

the address

of the r oLrtine

that

should

receive

control

if option

0 is

taken. lf this

operand

is not

specified,

no

check is

made

for a

response

of 0. you

would

use

this operand

only if the

$LMSG

macro

was

used

to generate

the parameter

iist.

OPN

1

-address

specifies

the address

of the routine tnat

should

receive

control

if option I is the fesponse. lf this

operand

is

not

specified,

no

check is

made for a response

of

1. You would use

this

operand

onlV

if the

$LMSG

macro

was

used

to generate

the

parameter

list.

OPN2-address

specif ies

the address

of the routine ttrat

should

receive

control

if option

2 is

taken. lf this

operand

is

not

specif ied,

ncl

clreck is

made

for a

response

of 2. you would

use

this

operand

only if the

$LMSG

macro

was

used

to qen_

erate

the

parameter

list.

Generate

Displacements for System LoS 6L()GD)

"l-his

macro

instructiorr

generates

the fierlr.l

idirsi5

s1r61

offsets

for

the

system

log

pararreter

lists"

To iivcirl

rluplicate

labels,

you should

use

Ihis

macro

irtstrrrcliort

r:nly

L,iloe

ril;)

i)l

ogrant.

The format

of the

$LOG macro

instruclion

is:

General

SCP

Support

The

general

SCP

macro

instructions

allcw

you ro l)rovrcte

linl<age

to system

functions

by conrrnlrnicatirrg

with the

Model

15

system

contror

program.

Roi

lout/Rol I in Lin kage (

$

RO

L L)

This

macro

applies

to Program

Number

5704-SC1

only.

You use

$ROLL to interrupt

(roll

out) the

cunent proqranl

so

that another

program

can be executed.

Wherr

the

second

prograin

is finislred,

the first

program

is reinstatecJ (rollec.l

in)

and

continues

execulng.

Once

rollout

is

initiatecl,

the

CR-T/Keyboard

becornes

the

system input

device

until

otherwise

s1.,ci:ified

by the user

or

until

the

interrupted

program

is rollctl

in.

When

using

rollr:r,rt,

you should follow

tlrese

Droceciures:

Note

the

fr:llowing

restrictions:

a. l\ prograrrr

using

$ROLL carr

execute

irr

either

partition,

but wiil ackr-rowledq'r

the rollout

requesr

only

when

running

irr

partitron

1.

b. A program

usinq

$ROLL must he

so

clefinecl

to the

linkage

eclitor

using

thc ATTR p;rameter

in

the

OPTIONS

statement

(see

IBM Systern/3

Ovenay

Linkage Editor Reference

Manual, GC21 7b61).

c. lf the interrupting

prograrn

also

recnclnizes

rollout

requests,

these requests

will lte iqnored.

d. The

samt'

l/f) devices

are availahle

tc)

the interrupT-

Ing

program

as were

available

to the

irrigirral

plo-

qram

wath

exception

of tape

r-rnits.

e. Whenever

an

interrupting

prograrn

shares

the sarne

disk

files

as a rolled-out

progr.nl,

only reading

and updating

are

allowed by the

two proqrar,ns.

Loading

and adCitions

are

not

allowecj.

updating

are allowed

by the two programs_

L.oad-

inq

and

additions

are not allowerJ.

tz

2. lssue

the

$ROLL macro instruction:

The coding

generated

by the

$ROLL macro

instruc-

tion determines

whether

rollout has been

requested

by entering

the ROLLOTJT

operator

control

com-

mand. lf rollout

has not been

requested,

the

current

program

continues

executing.

lf the

recluest

is

pend-

ing the

rollout

routines

are

called. Rollout

performs

the

following steps:

a. Places

the current

program

(program

being

exe-

cuted

and the current

contenis

of the scheduler

work area

on disk.

b. Allows

a

new

program

or procedure

to be

run in

place

of the

current

Program.

c. Reloads

the original

program

and restores

the

of the scheduler

work area

and passes

control

to the point where

the orig-

inal

Program

was

interruPted.

The

format

of the $ROLL macro instruction

is:

INarrrell

$RoLL

I ITNDEX

l/2

I

INDEX-1

/2 specif

ies

which register can

be used

in the

macro instruction.

lf this

operand

is omitted,

register

2 is

used.

Find a Directory Entry ($F IND)

A load

module

must be

in tire object

library. Specific

infor

matiorr

must be

obtained

from the

module's

object

library

directory

entry

before

a

load

or fetch

can

be

performed.

There are

two ways

you can

locate a

load

module and ob-

tain

the

information:

. lssue a

$FIND

before

issuing a

$LOAD,

Form ll. The

information

obtained

during

the

f

ind is used

durinq

the

load

operatiolr.

o lssue

a lcad

with find ($LOAD, Form l). a

fetch

($FTCH)

or a

fetch

to address

($XCTL). These

func-

tions

perform

the

find operation

as

part

of their

normal

f

u

nctions.

The $FIND macro

instruction searches

the

object

librarv

directory

for the

requested

module name

and

returns the

directory

entry

in the

parameter

list.

lf you will need to use the

data

in register 2 at a later time,

you should save

the contents

of that register before

issuing

the -qFlND

macro

instructiurt.

The

format

of the

$FIND macro

instruction is:

lNamel

| $FrND I NAME-module[.FlND'address]

t,PAcK-q/Sl

NAME-module provides

the name of the module to be

found. Only names of object

modules

(O

modules)

can

be

entered

here.

FIND-address

specifies

the label

that becornes

the address

of a 12-bvte

parameter

list built

by the

generated

code.

Initially the parameter

list corrtains

input to the supervisor.

After execution,

it contairrs

the

directory

entry of the

module. The

format and

contents

of the

parameter

list

after

execution are

shown

in Figure 5. lf this operand

is

not specified,

a nlacro

label

is

generated.

PACK-P/S

specif

ies

the program

disk pack (P)

or the system

disk

pack

(S)

to be searched.

lf this

operand

is not specified,

P is assumed.

Load a Module ($LOAD)

This

macro

instruction

loads a

module

into storage

at

the

address

you specify.

Controi

is returned

a{ter

the module

has been

loaded.

You may then

pass

control

to the

module

at

the specified

address.

lf you will need to use the

data

in

register 2 at a larer time. you shoulo

save

the contents

of

that

register

before

issuing

the

$LOAD macro

instruction'

Two forms of this

macro

can

be used:

load

with find and

load only.

Load with Find (Form l)

The

load

with f ind

macro

instrttction

locates the

module

and

loads

it into main storage.

The

format of this

macro

instruction

is:

tNamel | $LoAD I NAME-module

name

[,FlND-address]

[,LOAD-!/address]

[,USE-R/I\R]

[,PLlST-address]

t,PACKf/Sl

Macro

Instruction

Statements 13

Entry

Disk l\rlclress

Nurn[;er

oi

I(:Xl

5OcI()t.i

Link edit

aooross

D is

Pr

l2

6 s ry',,,

t,

of RLDs

Entry pornt

addr ess

Sloraqe

srzi:

AttributL,s

I

').

I

2

Displace-

ment

5

I

8

A

Description

Cylinder/sector

acldres:

of the rnoclule.

Type O Sector Iength

of the moclule

in hexadecir:ral

Type R- Category

of roulirre

Hexadecimal storage address

at which the rnodule was linkage edited.

See note 2.

Number of bytt:s,

in hexadeci:nal,

into the first sector

containinq RLDs

of the first relocation

directory (RLD) entry of rhe mooure.

Hexadecimal

storage

address

at which progrant

execution beqins

{with_

Out

HLDs)

Arnount

ol

Byte 1:

Bir O

1

2

4

5

6

7

Byte

2:

Bit

0

1

storage

(in

sectors)

required

to execute

the

Flrogranl.

1

= Permanent

entry

0 = -l-emporary

entry

1 = Inquiry program

1 = Rollout,evoking

program

(S704-SC1

r::nly)

I = External

buffers

(if

byte 2,

bit 1

= 1)

(57O4-SC2

onty)

1

= Must run

in

dedicated

envrronment

(57O4-SC1

onty)

Reserved

(5704-SC2

only)

1 - Requires

source

information

1 = Deferred

mounting

allowed

1

=

PTF

apptied

1 .. Overlay

object

program

1

= The system

input device

rnust

be

dedacateLJ

to

th;s

program

i = Checkpoint/Restart

prograrn

1

= Externat

buffers

(if

byte l, bir 2 = 1

) (5704-SC2

only)

See note 1

1 - This

prograrn

will access

the source

file directly

1

= Macro

processor

is

allowed

(5704-SC1

onty)

1

--

Model 15D

program

(5704-SC2

onty)

1

= This is

a privileged

prograrrl

1 .. This

program

requires

that a new load

address

be

calculated

at load

time to place

it in nrain

storage

J

q

beyond

its

own program

contrnon region

6 1

- 3340

data

managemenr

(5704-SC1

only)

Reserved

(5704-SC2

onty)

7 Memory resident

overlays

Releasr.versiorr

of thts

^ntry.

1

' For 5/04-sc2 rhe

checkpoint/restart

and external

buffer attributes

are

mutually

exclusive.

2' For 5704-sc2, if the entry has

the

attributes

for external

buffers,

the low-order

byre

of the link edited

aLidress

conta'ns

the

nuntbet

of sectors

minus

i.

Figure

5. Find Parameter

List Description

14

Entry

Number

of Bytes

Displace-

ment Description

Disk Address

Number of

text sectors

Link edited

address

Displacement

of R LDs

Relocated entry

point address

Load address

2

1

2

1

z

4

6

9

Cylinder/sector

address

of the module in hexadecimal. See

note 1.

Sector

length of the module, in hexadecimal.

Storage

addressat

which the module

was

linkage

edited. See

note 2.

Hexadecimal displacement,

in bytes,

into the

f

irst sector containing

RLDs,

of the

first relocation directory (RLD) entry of the module.

Storage address

at which program

execution begins, after

resolving RLDs.

Address at which the requested

module

is loaded.

Notes:

1. lf a directory

entry was

not found on a load

with f

ind,

the

f irst

byte contains

a character O.

2. For 57O4-SC2,

if the entry has

the attributes

for external

buffers,

the low-order byte of the link edited address

contains

the number

of sectors minus 1.

Figure 6, Find Parameter

List after Load Execution

Macro

Instruction Statements 15

NAME-module name provides

the name

of the module to

be loaded

and is

required. Only O modules

can

be

specif ied.

FIND-address becomes

the address

of the parameter list

passed

to the find routine. The parameter

list is

generated

by the macro

processor.

After execution

of the load.

this

parameter

list

contains

the modified entry for the module

as shown

in Figure

6.

LOAD-2/address

specifies

the address

where

the module

is

to be loaded

into main

storage.

The 2 indicates

that the

address

is in register

2; the address

is

the symbolic address

where

the

module

is to be loaded.

lf this

operand

is

not

specified,

2 is

assumed.

USE-R/NR indicates

whether the code

generated

by the

macro

instruction

is to be

reusable

(R) or nonreusable

(NR).

lf the

operand

is not specified,

NR is

assumed.

You can reuse

the generated

code

to load

the same module

more

than

one

time,

or to load

different

modules.

lf you

wish to load

different modules

using

the same

generated

code,

you should

also

specify

the PLIST

operano.

PLIST-address

is

used

only when the generated

code is

reusable.

The

address

specified

identifies

the leftmost

byte of a parameter

list passed

to the load

routine. To

load

a

different

module

using

the same

generated

code.

you must

update

the

parameter

list

to indicate

the

desired

module. Figure

7 shows

the format and

contents

of the

parameter

list.

PACK-P/S

specifies

the program

disk pack (p) or the

system

disk pack (S)

containing

the requested

module.

lf this

operand

is not specified,

P

is

assumed.

Load Only (Form ll)

The

load-only

macro

instruction

loads

a module

previously

found

by the

$FIND

macro

instruction.

The format

of

this

macro

instruction

is;

lName)

| $LOAD

I FIND-address

[,LOAD.2/address]

[,PACK-P/S]

FIND-address

is

the address

used

in the previous

$FIND

macro

instruction.

lt identif

ies the

directory

entry

of the

module

in main

storage.

After execution

of the load,

this

address

points

to the directory entry of the module as

shown

in Figure

6.

LOAD-2/address

specifies the address

where

the module

is

to be

loaded

in main storage.

The 2 indicates

that the

address

is in register

2; the address

is

the symbolic address

where

the module

is to be loaded.

lf this

operand is

not

specified,

2 is

assumed.

PACK-P/S specifies the program

disk pack (P)

or sysrem

disk

pack (S)

containing

the

requested

module. tf this

operand is

not specified, P

is

assumed.

Load a Module and Pass

Control ($FTCH)

The fetch

macro

instruction

(gFTCH)

finds

a module

in

the

directory,

loads

the

module

into main

storage,

and

passes

control to it. Your program

does not regain

control.

When

a module is fetched into main storage,

the relocation

factor

is

added,

as necessary,

to the module,s

link

edit

address.

This

determines

the location

in

main

storage

where

the module

is

loaded.

The module

receives

control

at its

entry

point.

Entry

Number

of Bytes

Displace-

ment Description

rvrooure

I

vpe

Module

Name

FE

Load

Address

I

o

1

0

o

9

Must

contain

O to indicate

an

object

module.

The

name

of the module

to be

loaded.

X'F E'

The address

at which the module

is to be

loaded.

FigweT. Load Parameter

List Description

16

lf you

will need

to use

the

data

in register

2

at a later

time,

you

should

save

the

contents

of that

register

before

issuing

the

$FTCH macro

instruction.

The

format

of

the

$FTCH

macro

instruction

is:

NAME-module name specif

ies

the object module to be

fetched into main storage.

The name

must be

rne same

as

the name

in the directory enrry.

PACK-P/S

specifies

the program

disk pack (p) or the

system

disk

pack

(S)

containing

the requested

module. lf

this operand

is

not specified,

p is

assumed.

Load a Module and Exchange Control ($XCTL)

This

macro

instruction

finds

a module

in

the

directory,

loads

the

module

into main

storage

at

the

address you

specify,

and

passes

control to it. Control is

not returned

to your program.

As

with the

$FTCH macro

instruction,

relocation

factors

are

resolved,

and

control is

passed

to

the entry point of the program.

The format

of the

$XCTL macro

instruction

is:

NAME-module name specifies

the name

of the module to

be loaded

and

given

control. The module must be

an O

module.

LOAD-2/address

specifies

the address

where

the module

is

to be

loaded

in main storage.

The 2 indicates

that the

address

is

in register

2; the address

is

the symbolic address

where

the

module

is

to be loaded.

lf this

operand

is

not

specified,

2 is

assumed.

PACK-P/S

specifies

the program

disk pack (p) or tne

system

disk

pack

(S)

containing

the reguested

module.

lf this operand

is

not specif

ied,

p is

assumed.

tNamel

| $XCTL I NAME-module

name[,LOAD_2/address]

t,PACK-P/Sl

Generate

a Translate

parameter List (gTRL)

This

macro

instruction

generates

a

parameter

list

neecied

by the

Model

15 Translate

routine. This

list

is

callecl

via

the

$TRAN macro

instruction.

gTRL does

nor

generate

executable

code. Figure

8 shows

the

format

of the

translate parameter

I

ist.

Translate Routine Operation

To use

the

Model

15

translate

routine, you must

provide

a

translate

area.

The format

of the

area

is:

Byte Field Description

0 Byte

contents

used

to determine

whether

a

character

is

to be

translated.

i Byte

contents

are

substituted

for

characters

that are not to be

translated.

2-257 256-byte

translate

table.

The

translate

routine processes

a

f

ield,

specif

ied

by the

$TRAN macro

instruction,

one

byte

at

a time.

The

translate

table

must

be

constructed

so that

the

disolace

ment

(from

the

beginning

of the

table)

of the

translated

representation

of a

character

is

equal

to the

hexadecimal

representation

of the untranslated

character. (For

example,

if

you

want

to translate

X,C1'to X,4

1,,

vou could

construct

a

translate

table

in

which

the

value

at

displace_

ment

X'Cf in

the

table

is

X,4i'.\

The

contents

of the

byte

at

a

given

displacement

are

com_

pared

with the

contents

of the

first

byte

in

the

translate

area

(byte

0). lf an

equal

compare

results,

the

cnaracter

is

considered

to be

invalid

and

the following

actions

are

performed:

The

completion

code

in tne

parameter

list

is

set

to indi-

cate

that

an

invalid

character

was

detected.

The

hexadecimal

value

in

the

second

byte

of the

trans_

Iate

area

(byte

1

) is

substituted

for the

original

cnaracter.

lf an

unequal

compare

results.

the hexadecimal

value in

the

translate

table

is

substituted

for the

original

character.

The

format

of the

$TRL macro

Instruction

is:

o

TO-address,FROM,address,LEN-number

TRT-address

Macro Instruction

Statements 1-t

To-address

specifies

the symbolic address

of the first byte

of the

data

to which

the

translated

data

will be

moveo.

FROM-address

specifies

the symbolic address

of the first

byte

of the data

f

ield

to be

translated.

This

address

may

be

the

same

as the

address

specified

in

the

TO operand.

LEN-number specifies

the decimal

length

of the FROM

f ield.

TRT-address

specifies

the symbolic acldress

of the f

irst

byte

of the translate

area.

All four operands

are required.

Generate a Translate Table ($TRTB)

This

macro

instruction

generates

an EBCDIC

to ASCII

or

an

ASCII

to EBCDIC

translate

table. The

table

is

generated

in

the format

required

by the

$TRL macro

instruction,

and

can

be

addressed

by $-f

RL when you translate

data.

The format

of the

gTRTB macro

instruction

is:

INamel

I srnre I lcoDE.E/Al

I,HEX-hexl

CODE-E/A specifies

whether the character

code

of the

data

to be translated

is

EBCDIC

(E)

or ASCil (A). lf tfrls

operand

is

onritted,

EBCDIC

(E)

is

assumed.

lf CODE_E

is

specified,

$TRTB generates

a

258-byte

table;

if CODE-A

is

specified,

$TRTB generates

a 130-bvte

table.

Note: lf you specify

CODE A, you may want to specify

DC 128XL1'FF' after

the

$TRTB macro

instruction

to

allow

for invalid

ASCI I

characters"

HEX-hex specifies

the hexadecimal pattern

with which to

replace

any invalid

characters

found

during

translation.

lf

the

HEX operand

is

not specified,

the

replacement

char-

acter

is

X'3F'

for

EBCDIC

or X,1A,

for

ASCll.

Generate an lnterface to the Translate Routine ($TRAN)

This

macro instruction generates

an interface

to the Model

1

5 translate

routine. After the translate

routine

has

finished,

control

is returned

to your program

with a com-

pletion

code

in

the

translate

routine

parameter

list. Tlre

address

of the

parameter

list

is in register

1. You should

check

the completion code

to see

if any characters

that

are not to be

translated

were encountered-

The format

of the

$TRAN macro

instruction

is:

IName1|

$TRAN| [TRLaddressl

TR

L-address

specif

ies

the symbolic address

of the translate

parameter

list. lf this

operand is

not entered.

the

address

is

assumed

to be

in register

1. See

Figure

8 for a description

of the

parameter

list.

Snap

Dump Main Storage ($SNAP)

This

macro

instruction provides

an interface

with the

non-

terminating

system

storage

dump routine. you must

specify

a dump identifier

and the

limits

of the area

to be

dumped. The

contents

of the

specified

main

storage

area

are

put on

the 1403

printer. Output

from the

dump

routine

consists

of:

The

specified

dump identifier.

The

contents

of register

1 (XR

1), register

2 (XR2),

the

Instruction

Address

Register

(lAR), the

program

Mode

Register

(PMR),

the

Address

Recall

Register

(ARR),

and

the Local

Storage

Register

(LSR).

The

contents

of the

specif ied

main

storage

area.

Control is

returned

to the next

seqltential

instructicr-r

irr

your program.

Field

Length Field Description

2

z

1

Address

of the translate

area

(your

program

must

define

the translate

area)

FROM field address, for translation

TO f

ield

address for translation

Number

of bvtes

to translare

Completion

code:

X'00' -translation complete,

no errors

X'FF' -invalid character

detected

Figure

8. Translate

Parameter

List

18

-l-he

forrnat

of ttre

$SFJAP

rrr.r(:ro

irrstrrtctiorr

is:

r--.-T------l_*.-'

|[Name] | $SNAP I lD-ir''y,SIARl-actrlress,ENll-address

r.__.__-t__._

_ t _

lD-hex

specif ies

a 2.lry.re

hexa<jecirnal

rrurrrber

to be used

as the durnp

identif

ier.

START-address

specifies

tlre

symbolic u,ldr.r, of the low-

storage limit of the

area to lle

dunrped.

END-address

specifies

tlre

synrbolic

address

of the high-

storage

limit of the

area

to be

durnped.

All three

opet"ancls

are

requirecl.

Obtain Sysfern Date (tDAT E,)

This

macro instruction generates

the

code

necessary

to

retrieve

the

systern

date

and

place

it at

a specified

location

in

your proqram.

lf you will need

to use

the data irr

register

2 at

a

later

irme,

you should

save the

contents

of tllat register

bef

ore

issuing

the

$DAl-E macro

instruction"

'Ihe

format

of the

$DATE macru,

instruction

rs:

llNameJ | $DATE

| [LABEL.aooress] --_-l

___ _l_

_-_.___ _ _..".-,

_'_ I

LABEL.-address

irrdicates

tlre

arlrjrqss

of tirr:

leltrrro5t

byte

of a six-byte

area

in

which yor_r

want

the

systerrt

date

placed.

lf lfris

r,:[rerand

is rlr:t

sper:if

ierl,

ilre

arlr]ress

ar

whiclr

you want the rJate

to be

placerl

is

assrrrrrerl

to be- in

register

2.

Generate Tirner IQB (ST'l{JU)

-l

lris rnacro

instructiot't

generates

an lQU l(Jr

the tnterval

tinter.

$l IOB

rrrust

be usecl

il you

trse

$Sll. $[]lT, or

$TOD in

your program.

The for

rnat

o{ tl,c ti,rr1'r

IOB

is

showrr in Appenclix C: lnputiAutpui Bltscks.

The format

of the

$TIOB macro

instrrtction

is:

1lru",,-'ul lslor I lonrr

vlnrl

L - " t__. __l-- -,

DATE-Y/N specifies

whether

a date f

ield

is ro l;e

gcnerated

lf this operand is not entered.

N (no)

is assurnecl. lf the

$TOD macro

instruction

is used

in your prograrn,

Y (yes)

must

be entered.

lf DATE-Y is

specified. use of the

$SlT

macro

instruction

destroVs

the

date

in the timer lOB.

Set lnterval Timer ($SlT)

This macro

instruction

sets the interval

tinter to cause

a

timer interrupt

after the specified

amount

of tinre has

elapsed.

Before

issuing

this

macro

instruction

you rnust

place

the desired

interval in bytes 2-7 of the tirner lOB.

When

the interval is

set, byte

8 in the

timer IOB is

set to

X'00'. When

the interval is

expired,

byte

8 is

ser to X'40'.

The

format

of the

$SlT macro

instruction

is:

tNamei

| $SlTl

trOB

namel

[,TypE-DgJ/BtN/rL,iToD]

[,ITYP

E.R

EA

UWA IT/TASK

]

IOB-narne specifies the name of the tirner IOB

qeneratcrl

by

the

$TIOB

macro

instructiorr. lf tlris operand

is ornitted,

the

address of the IOB is

assr-imed to be irr re-qister

2.

TYPE-DEC/BlN/TU/TOD specif ies thr:

format of the time

interval

in the lOB. You nrust establish

the tirne interval

irr bytes 2-7 of the IOB before issuing

the

$Sll' ;iracro

rrr

struction. The valid

time interval

fclrrnats

are:

o DEC: Tlre

time interval is the

amount

of

tirne in decimal

that is

to elapse

Lrefore tire tirner interrupt. -Ihe

tirne

interval

is a six-byte decirnal nurnber

sperr,;ifyin.q1 hours,

minLrtes,

and seconds

(HHMMSS).

o BIN: The

tirne interval is

a 32-bit binary rrurnber

speci-

fying

the number

of seconds that

are to elapsr:

before the

tinrer interrupt. The binary valr-re

rnust

be riqfrt-justified

in bytes 4-7 of the

IOB field.

r TU: The tirne

interval

is a 32-bit binary

nunrber

speci-

fying

the number

of timer units

that are to r:lapse

before

the

tirner interrupt. One

tirner

unit is 3.33 nrilliseconds.

The binary

value must

be right-justified

in bytes 4.7

of

the

IOB field.

c TOD: l-he

time interval

is the actual tirne

of day when

tlre

tirnr:r interrupt

is to occur. The

tinre is

a

six-byte

rler:inral

number

specifying

the

hour, minutr:

arrd second

(HHMMSS).

It

this operand

is omitted, DEC

is assunred.

Macro Inslructicln

Slalements 19

o

ITYPE-REALMAIT/TASK

specifies

the type of interval

to

be timed.

The types

of time

intervals

are:

REAL: The

timer decrements

the

time

interval

continu_

ously

for

all types

of

processing.

WAIT: The

program

issuing

the

gSlT

macro

instruction

is

placed

in

a

wait

state

for

the

specified

time intervat.

When

the

time

has

expired,

control

returns

to

the instruc_

tion

following

the

$SlT

macro

instruction.

o TASK: The

timer

decrements

the

time

interval

only

while

the

task

issuing

the

$SlT

macro

instruction

is run_

ning.

lf this operand

is omitted,

REAL

is

assumed.

Return Time

and Date ($TOD)

This

macro

instruction

returns

the

time

of day

and the

system date

to the

program.

The

time

of day

is returned

in

bytes

2-7 of

the timer lOB,

the

system

date

in the

bytes.

DATE-Y

must

be specified

in

the

$TIOB

macro

instruction

if

the

$TOD

macro

instruction

is used.

The

format

of

the

$TOD

macro

instruction

is:

NameJ

I $TODI

tIOB-name]

[,REF.Y/NI

t,TYPE.DEC/BIN/TU

IOB-name

specifies

the name

of the timer IOB

generated

by the

$TIOB macro

instructir-rn.

lf this

operand

is omitted.

the address of the IOB is

assumed

to be in register

2.

REF-Y/N specifies

whether

the

macro

instruction

is being

issued from the transient

area

or a

program

partition. y

(yes)

indicates

the

macro

instruction

is

issued

bV

a transient

that must

be refreshed;N

(no)

indicates

it is

issued from a

program

partition. lf this

operand

is omitted,

N (no)

is

assu meo.

TYPE-DEC/BlN/TU specifies

how the time is

to be returned

in

the

timer lOB. The

valid

formats

are:

DEC: The

time

returned

is

a six-byte

decimal

number

indicating

the

time in hours,

minutes

and

seconds

(HHMMSS).

BIN: The

time

returned

is a

32-bit

binary number

indi-

cating

the time in

seconds.

The

bir.rary

number

is right-

justif

ied

in bytes

4-7

of the IOB

f

reld.

. TU: The

time

returned

is a 32-bit

bir-rary number

indicat-

ing

tlre

time

in timer

units.

One timer

unit is

3.33

milli-

seconds.

The

binary number

is right-justif

ied

in bvtes

4-7 of the IOB f

ield.

lf this

operand

is omitted.

DEC is

assumed.

Return lnterval Time ($RlT)

This macro

instruction

returns

the remairring

amount

of

time in

a time

interval

or cancels

an unexpired

time interval.

The remaining

time is returned

in bytes

2-7 of the

timer

IOB

established

by the

$TIOB macro

instruction.

The

time

interval

must have

been set

by the

$SlT macro

instruction

and

is

returned

in

the

format

specified in

that macro

instruc-

tion.

The

format

of the

$R

lT macro

instruction

is:

tNamel

| $RlT I llOB-namel LCANCEL-Y/Nl

IOB-name

specif ies the name

of the

timer IOB

generated

by

the

$TIOB macro

instruction.

lf this

operand

is omitted,

the

address of the IOB

is assumed

to be in reqister

2.

CANCEL-Y/N specifies

whether

the remaining

time in the

interval

is to be

cancelled.

lf this operand

is

omitted,

N (no)

is

assurned.

End-of-Job ($EOJ)

The

$EOJ

macro instruction

generates

the linkage

required

to execute

the end

of job routine. The

option

to perform

an rmmediate

cancel

or a controlled

cancel is

provided.

The format

of the

$EOJ macro instruction

is:

IName]I

$EOJ I [CANCEL-NORMALiIMMED/CoNTRL]

20

C A N

C E L N 9 frAAlL I M M E

D/C

O/VfFL specif ies

the

action

that the

system

should

take

as

it terminates

tne

program.

lf this

operand is

omittecl

or if NORMAL is

specified

arrd

the

system is in l-IALT

mocle,

an enti

of job

step message

is

issued

and

job processing

terminates

in the

partition;

if NOHALT mode is in

effect,

no

message

is

issued

and

job processing

continues.

lf IMMED is

specifieci,

the

disposition

of files

depencls

uporr

the function

being

perforrnecl

:

Ner,v {iles

being

created

will not be retained

Old

files

beinq

deleted

will

be retained

Old

files

being

added to will

not reflect

the addirrons

Old

f iles

being

updated

will ref lect

the updates

made

prior

to

the

point

at which

this

$EOj macro

instruction

was

executed

| . ROO f iles

(except

for consecutive)

will ref

lect

additions

I

I if file

sharing

(5704-SC2

only).

lf CONTRL is

specified,

the l'iles

being used

by your pro-

gram

reflect

all

activity

which

took place

up

to the

point

the

$EOJ

macro

instruction

was

executed.

Page

of G

C21

-7608-2

lssued

29 September

1978

By TNL: cN21-5649

lf

your

program

specifies CANCEL-IMMED

or CANCEL

CONTRL and it is

a step of a

job or a

procedure

in

a

chained

procedure,

all remaining

steps in the

job

or all

remaining

procedures

in

the

chained

procedure

are cancelled

Also,

EJ

or ES

is displayed

regardless

of the

status of the

system halt mode,

and

job processing

in

that partition

te rm i nates.

lf either

CANCEL-IMMED or CANCEL CONTR

L is speci-

f

ied, the input

stream is

flushed

in

the

following

manner:

lf you are executing in

job mode on

a system on

which

input

spooling is

active,

job processing

in

the partition

resumes

with the

input

queue.

lf you are

executing in

job mode

on a system on

which

input

spooling

is not active, the

job stream in the system

reader

is

flushed

until a

JOB

statement or a slash

oeriod

(/.)

statement is encountered.

lf you are

executing in step mode,

the input

stream

will

be

flushed

until a JOB, LOAD, CALL, slash

period

(/.)

or slash

ampersand

(/&) statement is encountered.

Macro I r'rstruction

Statements

General SCP Support 21

Pase

of GC21

-76O8-2

lssued

29 September 1978

By TNL: cN21-5649

INPUT/OUTPUT

SUPPORT

MACROS

The

input/output

support

macro instructrons

prov:d,t

access

to devices

without requiring

that

you wriie extcr:sr;r

rou-

tines

to perform

each function. The

input.toutput

slrpport

macro instructions

are divided into eight

groups.

1. General macro

instructions

are usctj wilh c;.

.tr-r!UU

types.

The

following

macros

rrc ,r :r::j

vl .

$ALOC

$cKL

I

$CHK

}

$CLOS

$COMN

$DTFO

$OPEN

Teleprocessrng

oniy

2. Card

macro instructions

support

card

devtces.

The

following

macros

are in

this

group.

$DTFC

$GPC

$GETC

$PUTC

3. Printer

macro instructions

suppcrt

prrnter

urcces.

The following macros

are in

thrs

qrouFr.

$DTFP

$PUTP

4. Disk macro

instructions

provide

!J.iiiJrt

airc :rrrkage

to disk data management. The tc'tiowtilg t-licjLrcs

are

in

this

group:

5 -lape

macrl

i{)sttucirols

provirtc

sutrport

and linkage

ir iape rjat: rnailagenrent.

Tfis foilorvrng

macros

are

in

this

g!.ot.tp.

SCTL

T

$D]

FT

$GETT

$PUTT

$\ruBT

T

$WTT

6 Devtce

inclcprg166n1 macto instructrons

provide

sup-

iiL)rt

and Iirrkage

to devrce

rndependent

data manage-

i:rerit

The

io;lowing

rnacros

are in this

group:

$DTF

I

SGETI

$PUTI

'l CRT

rnacro

instructions

supoort CRT devices.

The

':.jiiowlrg nraL'ros

are In this qroull:

$COEP

SDTF

S

SPF

KT

$PF

KY

SPGS

qpt rT(

8 374

i rnacro

instructrons

provide

support

and

linkage

ro 374

1 data

rranagement. fhe following

macros

are

iir

this

gro!rp,

$DTFK.

$GEI

K

$PUTK

General l/O Support

ifre qe:reral

liO support

macro instructions are used with

bcth unit record,

tape. ar-rd disk

devices. The normal

sc(lucrrcc

tor .rsirrg

tr;cse

mdcro

rnstr

Lrctions is:

$ALOC to allocate

the device to your program

oartitton.

$OPEN

to rrreDare

the

file

or device for use

liO operatiorrs and any

processing

required.

$CLOS

to prepare

the

file

and/or device

for iob

termrnatron.

$DTFD

$GETD

$IOBD

$IOED

$PUTD

$RDD

$WAIT

$WRTD

22

Allocate Space (gAtOC)

The

routines

called

by the

$ALOC macro

instruction

allo-

cate

unit record

input/output devices

and space

on disk and

tape

devices.

These

routines

check

to ensure

that:

o The system

supports

the requested

device.

o The device

requested

is

available

to the requesting

program.

o The LOCATION parameter

of the

OCL file

statement

is

valid.

o The

correct

disk

pack

is

mounted

and

space

is

available

to the

calling

llrogram.

o The number

of disk, tape,

and device

independent

DTFs

in

the

calling

program

is

limited

as follows:

- 5704-SC1-The

timit

is

40.

- 5704-SC2-The

limit is

192

with at teast

a 10K

partition. The

limit is

129

with only an

gK

pa

rt

ition.

For

5704-SC2,

not all

192

disk

and

tape

DTFs

may

be

allocated

in

a single

call

to allocate.

The

maximum

number

of tape

and/or

disk DTFs in a single

chain

is

as

follows:

- lf

all

are disk,

the

maximum

is

16b.

- lf all

are

tape,

the maximum

is

14g.

- For combinations

of disk

and

tape,

the maximum

varies

between

148

and

165. To

determine

whether

or not

the DTFs

can

be

allocated

in

a

single

call

to

allocate,

multiply

the number

of disk

DTFs

by 17

and multiply the number

of tape DTFs by 19. lf

the sum of the above

two numbers

is not greater

than 2816,

the DTFs may be

allocated

in a single

call.

lf the DTFs

cannot

all

be

allocated

in

a single

call,

make

two DTF chains

and

two calls

to allocate.

An allocate

request

requires

that pre-operr

DTFs

be sup_

plied

as input

to tlre routine. For

a cjescriptiorr

of DTFs.

see Def ine the File for Card ($DTFC), Def ine the File for

Disk ($DTFD), Define the File for Device lndependent

($DTFI), Define the Fite for printer ($DTf il. Define the

File for CBT ($DTFS), Define the Fite for Tape ($DTFT),

and Define the File for 3741 ($DTFK). When the allocate

request

is

for a disk,

a tape

device.

or a device

independent

file,

OCL file

statements

are

also required.

More

than

one

DTF can

be

allocated

at one

time

by chaining

the DTFs.

To chain DTFs, you must enter

the address

of the next

DTF in

the DTF you are

building.

The

last

DTF in

a chain

has

X'FFFF' entered

in

place

of the

address.

lf your

program

operates

as an interrupt handler,

such

as a binary

syncnronous

communications

program,

all

DTFs

in

the

program

should

be

chained

together

and allocated

in one

operation. When

an

error

condition occurs,

the allocate

routine

calls

halt/syslog

to display

the

proper

halt

code.

Note

that if you will need

to use

the data

in

register

2 at

a

later

time, you should

save

the contents

of that register

before

issuing

the $ALOC macro

instruction.

The

following

output is

produced

when

control

is

returned

to your program.

a The contents

of register

1 are

restored.

. The

format-1

labels

and

configuration

recoro

are up-

dated.

o For

a non-disk

or non-tape

DTF.

bit 1 in

the rightmost

byte of the attribute bytes

of the post-open

DTF is

set

on

to indicate

device

allocation.

o For

a

device

independent

DTF,

the

device

code

(dis-

placement

0 in

the

DTF - $DFDEV) is

altered

to

indicate

the

appropriate

device.

. The address

of the f

irst DTF allocated

is returned

in

register

2.

Note: ll you are using

telecommunications,

$ALOC must

not be

issued

while

a telecommunications

operation

is

in

process.

o The correct tape input f

ile is

mounted. or the tape label

is

written on the output file, and

that the tape is

posi_

tioned

at

the

beginning

of the

file.

l\,1,rcrtr

lr-rstiur:rr.n

Statements 23

The format

of the

$ALOC

macro

instruction

is:

lNamel

l$ALoC I

IDTF-aodressl

DTF-address

specifies

the address of the high-order

byte of

the DTF being allocated. lf this operand is not entered, the

address of the DTF is

assumed to be in register

2.

Prepare An l/O Device ($OPEN)

This

macro instruction

prepares

an

input/output file for

data

transfer.

The file

to be

prepared

(opened)

must

pre-

viously have

been

allocated by using

the allocate macro

instruction. Depending

on the device,

one or more of the

following functions

are

performed

for each

f

ile opened.

o The

post-open

DTF is

formatted

(see

Figure

9).

o Pre-open

DTF information is

preserved

in

the

format-1

label

as reouired.

. Input/output

buffers, index buffers,

and

lOBs

are

formatted.

. Buffers

are initialized as reouired.

o Disk f ile

share area

is

prepared

as

required

(5704-SC2

only).

. Cards are

positioned

at the

wait station

for card

output

fi

les.

o The index

area

on disk for indexed

files

and the

data

area on disk

for direct

f

iles

are

formatted

as

required.

o Diagnostics

are

performed

to ensure

that:

- The

access

method

and the

f

ile organization

are

compatible.

- The

volume and

file

are

mounted

on

the

correct disk

or tape drive.

- Share attributes are checked

for disk

files

(5704-SC2

onlY).

/r/ote.'

More

than one DTF can be opened

at one time by

chaining the DTFs. To chain

DTFs,

you must enter

the

address of the

next DTF in

the DTF you are

building.

The last

DTF in

a

chain has X'FFFF'entered in

place

of

the address. See

$DTFC. $DTFD, $DTFl, $DTFP, $DTFS,

$DTFT. and

$DTFK.

Pre-Open

Conditions Post-Open

Conditions

1. Un{ormatted

DTFs

are

present

for output

files.

2. The l/O buffer is

in

the

unformatted

mode.

1. Formatted

DTFs

are

created.

2. l/O buffers,

lOBs,

and

various work areas are

f

ormatted.

A bit is

set

on in the

DTF attribute bytes

to

indicate

an opened

file

Figure

9. Comparison of Pre-Open and

Post-Open DTFs

and

Data

Areas

lnput: The pre-open

DTF and format-1 label

are

input to

the open

routine. Before

the open

macro instruction is

issued,

you must be sure to have the device allocated by

previously

issuing

the allocate

macro instruction. Also, if

you will need to use the data in register

2 at a later

time,

you should

save the contents of that register

before issuing

the

$OPEN

macro instruction.

You must

also consider

the

following

in

preparing

the DTF:

o The disk access

method must be

compatible

with the

disk

file

organization of the

file

being opened.

o The access

method must be

compatible

with the access

method of the same

file opened

in the other program

level

or for an inquiry program lsee

Rolloutl.

o The record

length,

block length. and key length must be

specified correctly.

o The file must have

share specified

if it isto be

shared

for disk files

(5704-SC2

only).

Output: The open routine returns

control to your program

when the requested file has

been

opened. The following

output is

produced:

o The contents of register 1 are

restored.

o The format-1 labels

are

updated.

o Bit 7 in the rightmost

attribute byte in the post-open

DTF is set on to indicate the

file

has

been

opened.

. The device code

(displacement

0 in

the DTF - $DFDEV)

is

altered to indicate

the

unit on

which

the

disk

or tape

file resides.

o The buffers are initialized.

The

format

of

the

$OpEN macro

instruction

is:

l'

The address

of the last

DTF opened

is

returned

in

register

2.

The file share

area

is

updated

for disk

files

with share

specified

(5704-SC2

onty).

For

a description

of

the

checklist

entries,

see Figure

10.

Disp Field

Description

0

t-z

Flag

byte:

X'80'-Skip this

entry

X'40'-Request

key

(pF

Key

9) should

be

checked

X'2O'-This

is

the last

entry

in

the

checklist

X'10'*Return control

to the

user if

no l/O

com_

pletion

is found

(significant

only

in

the

first entry of a checklist)

X'08'-Code destroyed

X'04'-Program f

unction key not available

Address

of the DTF for this

entry

Figure

1O. Checklist

Format

For

a

description

of BSC,

see

lgM System/3

Muttiline/

Multipoint Binary synchronous communications Reference

Manual,

GC21-7573.

The

format

of the

gCKL

macro

instruction

is:

tNamel

| $cKL I orr aooress[,sKtp-y/Nl

t,REoK_yA]

t,RTN.Y/N] I,LAST-Y/N]

DTF-address

specifies

the symbolic address

of the first byte

of the DTF for which

this entry

is

being

created.

A dummy

DTF, 15

bytes

in length,

is

required

to check

if the

pFg key

was

pressed.

Displacement

X,00. in this DTF should

con_

tain

a X'10'and a completion

code

will be

returned

at dis_

placement

X'0E'.

SKIP-Y/N specifies

whether this entry should be

skipped

when the checklist

is

scanned. lf this operand

is

omitted,

N (no) is

assumed.

lf Y is

specified, you must update

the

checklist

entry before

you can

check

the DTF specified

in

this macro instruction. you can

access

the skip indicator

in the entry by using

the name

specified

on the macro in_

Struction.

REOK-Y/N specifies

whether the check

routine (see

index

entry $CHK macro instruction) should check if the pF9

key has

been

pressed.

Whenever

you want the check

rou_

tine to check for a PF9 request, you must include

a dummy

DTF in the checklist

and specify REOK-Y for that entry.

REOK-Y is

ignored

if it is

specified

for a DTF that is

not

a

dummy PF9

DTF (a

device

code

of X,10,

in

the first

byte

of a DTF denotes

a dummy pFg DTF). lf tne

operator

pressed

the PFg key, a

completion code

of X,SO,

is

posted

at displacement

X'0E' of the

dummy DTF.

DTF-address specifies

the address

of the leftmost byte of

the DTF for the

file

to be

opened. lf this

operand

is

not

entered.

it is assumed

that the address

is

in register

2.

Note: Any files

opened

during a

job should

be ctosed

before

the job ends

($CLOS

macro). For 5704-SC2

onty,

any open files

will be

closed

during EOJ

processing

(nor_

mal or abnormal). Therefore.

DTFs must be

available

at

this

time. Any disk

files

opened

using

file

sharing

must

be

closed

to perform required

actions

on the file share

area.

Generate a Checklist ($CKL)

This

macro instruction

creates

an

entry for a checklist. lt

does

not generate

executable

code. A checklist

identifies

DTFs to be

checked

for llO completion, or determines

whether

the PF9 key has

been

pressed.

Two kinds of DTFs

can

be identified

in

the

checklist:

. Binary

Synchronous

Communications

(BSC)

DTFs

o Dummy DTFs

(1b-byte

DTFs

used

to check

for the

pFg

kev)

All the checklist

entries

thatare to be

tested

by tne same

$CHK macro

instruction

must

be issued

consecutively.

The same

DTF may be in the list more

than once. The

checklist

entries

that are

generated

are

contiguous

in main

storage. You can

then issue

the $CHK macro

instruction

to

test

the entire list,

by specifying

the first entry in the list;

or $gin testing

anywhere

in the list,

by specifying

the

label

of one of the later

entries.

Note: The address

you specify

in the $cHK macro instruc-

tion identifies

the beginning

of the check

operation. Any

entries

occurring

earlier

in the list are

ignored

in that

operation.

Macro

Instruction

Statements 25

RTN-Y/N

specif

ies whether

you

want

control

returned

to

your program

even

if no

l/O operation is

complete.

This

operand is

valid only

for

the

first

entry in the check list. lf

this

operand

is not

entered, N (no)

is assumed.

LAST-Y/N specifies

whether

this

is

the

last errtry in the

checklist. LAST-Y

(yes)

must be specified

for

the

last

entry. lf this operand is omitted,

N (no)

is

assumed.

Check for l/O Completion ($CHK)

This macro

instruction

generates

the linkage required to use

the

check routine.

You

must issue the

$CHK

macro instruc-

tion

for each BSC

get, put,

read, write. or online

test

request. For

a

description of BSC macro instructions, see

I

BM System/3

Multiline/Multipoint Binary Synchronous

Co

m m un ications R

eference

M an ua

I, GC21

-7

57

3.

lf you

will need

to use

the

data in

register

2 at a

later time,

you

should save

the

contents

of that

register before

issuing

the

$CHK

macro instruction.

Check R outine Operation

lVofe.' When using this macro, the

user

program

must

equate

$PARM

to 2.

The

check

routine

tests

for completion of an

l/O operation

by

examining the

DTFs identified

in

the

cheiklist

- see

Generate a Checklist

($CKL). lf an l/O operation

is com-

plete,

the completion

code is set

in

the

DTF, and the

ad'

dress of the DTF

is returned

in register

2 to the calling

program.

No

subsequent

DTFs

in the list are tested.

When

no l/O completion

is found by the

end of the check-

list, control

is returned to your

program

with the address

of the

last DTF

in

the

list register 2 if

:

Each entry

in the

list is inactive,

closed,

or has the skip

indicator on (a

completion

code of X'57').

RTN-Y was specified

in the

$CKL

macro

instruction

that

created the

f irst entry

in

the

checklist

(a

comple-

tion code of X'56').

The

format of the

$CHK

macro

instruction is:

lNameJ l$cgr | [cKL-address]

CKL-address specif

ies the symbolic address

of the f irst entry

in

the checklist.

You can

also begin at a subsequent

point

in

the checklist

by specifying the symbolic

address of a

later entry. lf this operand

is omitted, the address

is

assumed

to be in register 2.

Note: fhe address

you specify

identifies the beginning

of

the check

operation. Any entries

occurring

earlier in the

list

are

ignored in that operation.

Prepare a Device for Termination ($CLOS)

The close

macro instruction

prepares

a

device

for job

termi-

nation. The routine

returns

post-open

DTFs

to their

pre-

open

state and

updates

file labels to reflect the current

file

status.

For devices other

than

disk or tape,

only the

entries

requested

functions

are

restored. lf you will

need

to use the data

in register 2 at a

later

time,

you

should save

the contents

of that

register before

issuing the

$CLOS

macro instruction.

lnput to the close

routine consists

of the

post-open

DTF

and

the

format-1

labels. The allocate

and open

macro

in-

structions

must

have

previously

been

issued.

Output created by $CLOS is returned

to your program

when control

is

returned. The

output

consists

of

:

o The contents

of register 1 restored.

o The

post-open

DTFs

reinitialized

to the pre-open

state'

o Any pending

operations

for unit record devices

oerf ormed.

o The

format-'l label

for disk updated

to indicate

current

file status.

o The buffer contents

scheduled

for disk or tape

output

and

disk

update operations

written.

o The data

and

index

written to disk,

and an

indicator set

if key sorting

is required

at

end-of-job

for output

f iles

and

file

additions.

o Tape

trailer labels read

or written.

I o The f ile share area

is cleared

or updated

for the disk

I file specified

as share.

Note; More

than one

DTF can

be

cioseti.it

iine

tln{_, liy

chaining

the DTFs To chair DTFs,

eaci. DTF lL,, rre {j:olpc

must

contain

the

address

of the

nex.t

pJF: ir t!.ti.

cl-iarrr

The

last

DTF in

a chain has

X'FFFF'entere(i

rrr

llaco

of if:ir

add ress.

The format

of the

$CLOS

macro

insti-irctiL)n

is.

DTF-address specifies

th+ ad<lr.ess

of 1,:,

r.:

,1,11.)!r

j.),/,i.:.j.

the DTF to be closc,d. lf this <lperanr

j 1.:

,.;rr

{)!-r.t::r1,ij.

tiil

address

is

assumed

to be in Iegrst.r 2.

Generate DTF Offsets l$DTFO)

This macro

defines

the DTF labeis.

<;fi:iri: tieri.i

{r.,!rllrt:.

and field lengths

for all devices

a,rd

accr:;s

rrr,lirl_11;,r

!irfri,lJr.i

ed for the Model 15. To avoicl

ciuplrcati:

t31r,,i...

t,,; rnar.i.;.

Instruction should be r:sen'

O|rly

oncc r!r

riar.i-

i.rr.,,tr.]in:

1r,i)i,,

should also

set

the operands

to inclrcate

,l;:.7

!1,-:vri.i,s

y,^r;

plan to use

in the proqram.

The format of the $DTFO m.rcro irsi:!jc:r.

^ rs,

TDISK-YiN]

[,TAPE

Y,UJ

I,INI),Y;\]

IMFCUYIJ

:.|\1Ff'.

\ ;rl 1:,

[,D25O1

Y{\1] f .o:az+2 "N j :.ij1.113

y

t,D3284-Y{!i l,cnr v'\r l.aLL'v,\ri

i.F lt:

i-

D.

V 'tr't

i

Pase

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued

29

September

1978

By TNL: GN21-5649

MFCM Y l'l,

specif ies whether labels

are to be

generated

for

the MFCM. lf this

operand is not

specified, N (no)

is

assumed.

D374'! 't','AJ

specif

ies whether labels

are to be

generated

for

the

3741. lf this operand

is not specified,

N(no) is

assumed.

D25Oi '-"

,'1i

5psci{ies whether labels

are

to be

generated

for

the 250

I rr

tils ope.and is not entered, N (no)

is assumed.

D1442 Y'{ specif ies whether

labels

are to be

generated

for

the 1442 it this

operand ts not entered, N (no)

is

assumed.

D140..1

i '\,

.nscii:r'r

whether labels

are to be

generated

for

the l40lj !f this

operand is not entered, N (no)

is

assumed.

D3284 " t. snecrfies whether labels

are to be

generated

for

the 32E.1 ii ihis

operand

is

not entered,

N (no)

is

assumed.

CBT-Y rii

rrreci{ies

v;hether

labels

are

to be

generatecl

for

the C,?l- ;i this

operand is not entered,

N (no)

is

assumed.

AL L

'Y i.!'r

sDecif

;es

whether labels

are

to be

generated

for all

devices

sr.;;rnorted- lf this operand

is not

entered, N (no)

is

assumerl

FIELD .'' ,V

specrfies

whether

to generate

the labeis

which

def inc

1r"r' rrorrtenit

ior a

DTF field. lf this operand

is not

specifir',:

":'iyesl

't assumed.

COM

M

C

lV E,r Ltares

i

$COM

N

)

ihis q..i,,'

.r

.:rstiucl

i.rn

qenerates

eguates

for various

labels

dnci

v;i!.,'.,..

ruch

as

rr:)iJlster

equates,

which may be used in

the

pr

oi;r am. Th

is

macro

rnstruction

is not required.

The form;,ri

of the

SCOMN

macro instruction

is:

I .. ,^a^

DISK Y/N specif

ies

whr:ther

i;f;slr,

3,,'

11.

1;,

disk

devices.

lf this

operand is

noi enie'

irlr

assumed.

TAPE Y/N specif ies

whr:ther

labe!s

irrr,

i, .ri

tape device.

lt thrs

oftcraltd i-s

nc1

(;r'i

f

pf

.).1

assumed.

il.-:rlei:lti ir 1

4,,1t-lrl"r

, 1;i,':

,'

r ilr I I

i;: a

l! ii'.t ,i

IND YlN specif

ies wlretht:r

laheis

a", r

independent

device.

ll rhi5 r1;;19r;yr,l

iq

rs

assumed.

MFCU Y/N specif ies

whetlter labels

ar,.

:.) t)r'itrri,errT;.(,r rcl

the MFCU. lf this ctperarrd

is not entf re(i f..i

(,ro) is

assu,lecl

Macro I nstruction

StatemL.nts

General

l/O Support

Pase

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued

29

September

lgTg

By

TNL: cN21-5649

Card

Device

Support

This

section

describes

the

macro instructions

that support

card

devices.

The following

functions

are

providecl

:

Build

a

pre-open

DTF for card

device

and assiqn

its

off.

sets.

o Build

the interface

required

to read/punch/prrnt

records

using

a

card device.

The DTF provides

information

to the

card

tlevice

data man

agement routines

that perform

input/output

operartons.

Def ine the File for Card ($DTFC)

The DTF provides

information

needed

to allocate,

open,

and access

a

card

device. This macro instruction

qenerates

the code

that

builds

a card DTF.

The

format

of the

$DTFC macro

instruction

is:

IOBA-address

is

a

required

operand

specifying

the

address

of

the leftmost

byte

of the first

lOB.

The

area identified

by

this

operand must

be large

enough

to contain

one IOB

for

single

buffering

or

two lOBs

for

double

buffering

(specified

via the

operand

NIOB

2). The

sizes for

each

card

IOB

are:

2501

- 25 bytes

MFCU

- 29 bytes

1442

- 29

bytes

MFCM

- 31

bytes

NIOB-number

is

a requireti

clperand

specifying

the number

of lOBs

associated

with this DTF. This

entrv

must have

a

value c-if

1

or 2.

DEVcode specifies

the card

device

desirecl.

I'he

possible

values

for

code

are MFCUl, MFCU2,

MFCM1,

MFCM2,

1442,

and

2501. lf this

operand

is

omitted.

MFCUl is

assu med.

UP-tnask

specif ies

the nrask

to test the eight externai

indicators.

The

code for the UP-mask

must

be specified

as 8 binary

bits. For

example,

to test

bits

0,3, 5, and 7,

you

would

enter

UP-10010101.

The

UP-mask

is

compared

to the

external

indicators

set

on by the

SWITCH

statement

for conditionally

opening

files. lf the bits

that are

on in

the

UP-mask

are also

on in the

external indicators

set

on by the

SWITCH

statement.

the f

ile will be

opened. lf the Up-mask

is

all

zeroes

or not used,

the file

will be unconditionallv

opened.

Note: lnf

ormation

on settirrg

external

indicators

(SWITCH

statement)

can be found in the IBM System/3

Modet lS

System Control Programming Reference Manual (for

Program

Number

5704-SC1),

GC21-5077,

and in the

IBM System/3 Model l5 System Control programming

Concepts and Reference Manual (for Program Number

5704.SC2),

cC21 5162

IName]

| SDTFC I tOBA-address,

NtOB-number

[,DEVcodel

[,UP-mask]

[,CH

Naddress]

[,RCADaddress]

[,OPC<ode]

[,DEFER-Y/N] t,cAR

Dt-Y/Nl

t,PRrNT4-Y/Nl t,FEED-Y/Nl

[,STACKR-number]

[,R

EADA-address]

[,PUNCHA-address]

[,PR

I NTA.address]

[,R

EADL-number]

[,PUNCHL-numberl

[,PRl

NTL-number]

[,PRH

EAD-mask]

[,ALIGN-Y/N]

zo

Cf'lN-address

indicates

tirc

aridress

of the next DTF in the

chain

of DlFs lf there

is

rro

DTF

c;hain

or if

this is

the

last

DTF in

the

chairr.

the o1.rcr;.nd

should

be ornrtted

(X'F

F

F F' is

assiri'irt-'rl

).

flCAD,ar.lclress

sper:if

ics

thr lef1m651

byre of tlre

logical

recorcl

Ior .tn

.JutpLit

opelatror).

lf this

operand

rs

nor

errtered,

a rralue

of X'0000'is assr:med,

this

value

rnust

be

updated

before

an oLrtt)ut

{)peration

is

perfor.nred.

lt this

oLrerand

rs

specifierl for an input

operatron,

tlre

value

speci-

fied

will

not

be used,

arrcl liris

olterirnd

vyiti

bc modified

by

the

carcl

rlaia

rnarrarlement

rnodule

to contain

the

address

of

the

card

that

was read.

OPC-code

def ines

thc operation

code

tor the

Dl-F. A list

of the

possi[:le

codes

and

tlreir meanings

are:

Code Meanirig

FEED Y/N specif ies whether

or not to perform a feecl

oper-

ation

after

a 1442

punch

operation.

lf Y (yes)

is

specified

or if this operand

is omrtted,

a

feed

is

performed

aftef the

punch

operation.

STACKR-number specif ies the stacl<er

to be

used for this

card operation.

This

operand is

not used with the ZSOI" lf

this

operand

is not

specified,

the

byte

containing

rhe

stacker

number

will be set to X'00'.

Note: lf tlris

operar-rd

is zero

the followirrg

occurs:

stacker

one is used

if the

card originated

irr hopper

1;

the

higirest

nutnber

stacker

is used

if tlre

card origir-rated in hol.rper 2.

READA-address

specifies

the address

(at

a 128-bvte

tloun,

clary)

of the buffer

used

for read

or:erations.

lf double buf-

fering

is

used, both buffers

rrlust

be on i28-byte

bouncl-

aries,

and the

two buffers must

be contiguous

in

rnain

stor.

age.

You must

specify this

operand if you plan

to use this

DTF for a read operation.

PUNCHA-address

specif

ies

the address

(at

a 128-byte

boun-

dary) of the buffer

used for punch

operations

on the

1442,

MFCU,

or MFCM. lf dcuble buffering

is

used, both buffers

must be

on 128-byte

boundaries,

and the

two buffers mirst

be

contiguous in

storage.

You must

specify this

operarrd

if you plan

to use

this DTF for a

punch

operation.

PRINTA-address

specifies tl.re

adclress

(at

a 2b6-bVte

boun-

dary)

of the buffer used for print

operations

on

the MFCM

or the MFCU. For

the

MFCM,

the

buffer size

must be

64

bytes

times

the highest

print

head

used"

lf doultle

hrufferinti

is

used,

both print buffers

must

be contiguous

irr

main

stt_rr-

age. For

the MFCU,

the buffer

size must

be

128 bytes for

single buffering

and 256

bytes for dot.rble

buffering. lf two

DTFs

are being

used

for printing

from both hoppers

of the

MFCU,

the operation

must

be

single buftered

and

the DTFs

must use

the

same

256-byte

print

area.

You must

specify

this operand

if you plan

to use this

DTF for a

print operation

READL-number

specifies

the number

of card

columns

to

read.

This

operand

should

be used with thr_. MFCI\4

or 2b01

only. lf

this

operand

is not

specif ied,

the maxirnum

valrre

(80)

is

assumed.

PUNCHL-number

specif

ies

the number

of card

coturnns

tcl

punch. This

operand

should

be usecJ

rruitl'i

the l\,,1

FCM or

1442

only. lf this

operand is

not

specif

ierj.

the Inaxulrr,rrlr

value

(80)

is

assumed.

RD

PU

PR

PP

RPU

RPR

RPP

Read

Punch

Print

Punch

and

;.rrinl j Not allowed

for

Head

arrd

purrcir ( ft;f

f CVf

Ruari

arrd

prirrt ( o,

Read,

purrch,

and

print

I UfCrutZ

lf this

operand is not specified,

the operation

code

for a

feed

is

set.

DEFER-Y,/N

is used

only

with orrtprul

operations

to the

MFCM

and lVlFCU.

This

operand

enables

you

to print

one

record

or.r

a card and

punch

a clifferent

record

in

tne

same

card. The

$DTFC,

$PUTC,

and

$GPC

nracro

instructions

can

be usecj

to speciiy

rhis

plocess.

For

gGpC

or gpuTC,

yor.r

|1rLlst

first

issue

that macro

instruction

for either

a

pnnt

or

a

punch

with

DEFE

R-Y. You

then

modify

the

logical

recorcl

as needed

to a different

format

and issue

that

nracro

instruction

for the remaining

operatiorr with

DEFER'N. Both

olreratiorrs

are

theri

perfornrecj.

lf this

operand

is not spiecified,

N (rio)

is

assrrmerj.

CARDI Y,/fu

specif ies vrrhether

or not to perform a reacl

card

image

operation

onlt'': 1442

or 21501.

lf N (no)

is .

specified

or if this oJ;erancl

is

orrrirted,

a card imagr:

read

is

not performed.

PRINT4 Y/N specifies whether

to print

threc

or four

tiers

for a

print request frorn

the MFCU. Y (yes)

indicates

that

forrr

trers

shorrirl

be

printetl,

rl

thrs

operand is

omitted

or

if

N (no)

is

specified,

three

tier:;

are

printecl.

Macro

Instr uc

tion Statements 29

PRINTL-number specifies the number of columns

to print

per

head

on the

MFCM. lf this operand is not specified,

the

maximum value

(64)

is assumed.

PRHEAD-mask

def ines

the print heads

selected

for the

MFCM. The mask must

be

specified

as an eight-bit

field.

lf this operand

is omitted,

the current

setting of the

print

head

selection

byte

in

the DTF is not modified. The

fol-

lowing

table shows

the

meaning

of each

bit.

The code

generated

by this

macro instruction

gives

control

to the data

management routine;

the

routine

completes

execution

and

returns control to the

generated

code. lf

the ERR or EOF operand

is

specified,

the

generated

code

tests the completion

code

returned by data

management

and

branches to your routine.

The

format

of tlre

$GETC

macro instruction

is:

IName]

| $cETC | [DEV-code]

[.DTF'acldressl

I,EOF-address]

[,ERR-adclress]

[,OPC'Y/Nl

[,READL-number]

[,CARD

l-Y/N

J

[,STAC

KR'number]

DEV-code

specifies the appropriate

device.

One of the

following codes must

be

used: MFCU,

MFCt\4,

1442, or

2501. lf this operand is

not

specified,

default

is made

to

MFCU.

DTF-address

indicates

the address

of the leftmost byte of

the DTF for this

file. lf this

operand

is not

specified,

the

address

is assumed to be

ln reEister 2"

EOF-address specifies

the address

in your program

that re-

ceives control

when the end-of-f

ile is detected.

lf this oper-

and

is not supplied,

no code

is

generated

to check

for the

end-of

-f

i le cond

ition.

ERR-address

supplies

the address

in your program

where

control

is

passed

if the controlled

cancel

option is taken

in

response to a

permanent

l/O error. lf this operand

is omit-

ted, no code

is

gerrerated

to checl<

for the controlled cancel

completion

code.

Note: lf ER R

or EOF addresses

are

not specified,

you

should

check the

return code

in

your program

to determine

the

outcome of the

operation.

OPC-Y/N indicates

whether or not the read operation

code

should

be

altered

in the DTF. lf Y (yes)

is

specified,

the

read/punch/print

bit in the

operation

code

is

set to indicate

a

read. lf N (no)

is specified

or if this

operand

is

omitted,

read/punch/print

bit in the

operation

code

is not modified.

READL-number

specifies

the number

of columns

to read

lrom the

MFCM or 25O1. lf this operand

is not specified,

the DTF remains unchanged.

Bit

0and1=0

z- |

3=1

4=1

5=1

6=1

Meaning

Unused, must

be zero

Select

print

head

six

Select

print head five

Select

print

heacl

four

Select

print

head

three

Select

print head

two

Select

print

head

one

ALIGN Y/N specifies

whether

to print in

a special

format

on the

l\4FCM.

lf Y (yes)

is

specified, the first

64 charac-

ters are

printed

with print

head

1

and

the next 1

6 charac-

ters

are

printed

right-justified

with print head 2. lf N (no)

is specified

or if this operand is not entered,

prirrting

occurs

in

the

normal

manner.

Construct a Card Get lnterface ($GEfC)

The

$GETC

macro instruction

generates

the interface re-

quired

to communicate

with card data management

when

a

record

is

being

read from a card device.

To use this

instruc-

tion,

you must

construct a card DTF for the

file

and use

the

$DTFO macro instruction

to establish

the offsets

in

the DTF. lf you will need

to use

the data

in register

2 at a

later

tinre,

you should save the contents of that register

be-

fore issuing

the

$GETC

instruction. You must also

provide

the

labels for the necessary data rnanagement routines, via

EXTRN statements

in

your program.

The

names

of the

data

management routines

for each

device are:

Module

Name

$$MFRD

$$MMRD

$$anPr

$$AR

R D

Device

MFCU

MFCM

1442

2501

30

L'AB!-)l 1.,/A/

specifies rtrlrctlrer

tci

perfornr

a read

card image

\)i.)eralil,n()nli)e

l142ttr

250

1. lf \'(yes)

isspecified,the

c.rrtl

irit.rtltr

iearl

lri.t

in Llie oper-ation

code is

set on. lf N

irroi

i: s1i":r;r

fir:cl,

tire

carrl irnage

bit in

the operation

code is

set rrtf

. lf titis t_r1_ierarirl

is oriiitted,

tlrc,

status

of the

card

n,rd!J()

tt:ad

ltrt rrr

tlre

()lteratiorr

code is

not modif

ied.

.', /;1L"^

1:i r:titrtbtt :;rtlcrf

ies

tlre

slacker

to be used for hold-

rii(J

tirr

l:ards

after llre read

operation_

-l'his

operand

is not

Lrsr:ti

'i';itf

t

tlre

il50 I

. lf this

operarrd

is not

given,

the value

iri

tlrc D'l-l-:is

rri_rt

clrar-rge<1.

L',J!iii.i

t!L.L

a ilatti PuI lttterface l:$pU

fC)

l lris rirar;t.ir

instrrrctiorr

getic,fates

the interface

needed

to

corrrrrrrrrricale

uritli

card data

rnarragement

when

punching

arrrj,/t;r

;rr

rrrtirrg

a cartl filc. Yorr

rnust

provide

a DTF for

ilrt: I

ilr;

iiri(l

ri5(

j tlli)

$DTF0 macro

instruction

to establish

lltr: oft:els

in

tiie D-fF. Yorr

must

also

provide,

through

EX-TRl{

staterrterts

in

',rour

program,

the labels

of the

card

r.la1a

nr;rrragr:rnent

rnctdules

ltecessary

to pr;rform

the

output

ol)erati.)n.

Tire narnes

of the

data rnanagetnent

routines

for

tid(.1

i iic\Iii.ii ai e:

Motllrle ItJarue

$$r\4

FPP

$$IVI\4PP

$$ARFI:

Device

MFCU

tul

FCt\4

1442

lf 1'Lrrr

rret:tl

t()

lse the tlata

irt register

2 at a later

time,

yorl

shoLrlcr

save the

contents

of that register

before

issuing

the

$Pl.jTC

irrsir.r rr:1iorr.

fhe

code

gerroratecl

by this

ntacro

instruction

gives

control

to tlre data management

routine. The ror.rtine

completes

execLttion

a;':d returns

control

to the

generated

code. lf the

E

R R o1;r:rund

is

specif ied,

tlre

generated

code checks

the

conrpletiorr

ctitle for errors

and

branches

to your error

rou-

tine i

f ei rors

occLlrrecl.

-l-he

forrrrat

of the

$PUTC

macro

instruction

is:

DEV'code

specifies

the

appropriate

device.

One

of the

fol-

lourir-rg

cotles

must

be used: MFCU,

MFCM,

or 1442. I't

tl.ris operand

is not specified, default

is

made

to MFCU.

OPC-code

specifies

the operation

code to be us.;Lj. if tlris

operand

is not specified,

the

statirs of tlrr.:

J.riiirt,/lrLrrir:l'r

Lrits

in

the operation

code

is

not charrged.

\/alirj

coLlr-'s

are as

f

ol

lows:

Code Mcarring

Punch

Pl

int

Print

anC

trrrrrch

(-[his

ccde ir; rrut

alio-vvi:rJ

for l/l FCfl.,1

DEFER Y/N speci

fi€s

whetlrer

tltt:

prirrt

an{1,/u(

I)ilnch

uirer

ation should

be deferred.

lt Y'(,lesl

is

specirieil

tiie

clafer

operation

bit in

the

operalii/r'r itc,-i.t

r! :;r

r,l', if l.i

{ric}

is

specified,

tlre defer oi.lr-ii;i

i,,t l-it1 irr tir,:

olrotiltiLlrj

(.){)i.l::

t\

set off. lf this o[,,eranrl is rirrt

specificd, [ .r]

-11.atus oi ii..:

defer

bit is

not changed.

PRINT4-Y/N specifies whetirer ro prirrt

orr fotr tiers

oi tire

MFCU

card.

lf Y (yes)

is -specified.

the foLrrtir

rier

prirrt

bit

in

the operation

code is

set or; if N iira)

is

specifierl,

tlre

fcurth

tier

print

bit is sei rf

f lf this oper:,:rrri i,;i)riritterl,

the status of tlre

fourth tier

plint [lit ir-r tlie

operation

codo

is not changed.

FEED-Y/N

specif ies whether

to lierfornt

.r ieeri

oper-ariurr

followrng

tlte'1442

punch

operatiorr. Y (yes)

irrdicates

r-frat

a feed

should

occur

after

the

prritch;

if N (rro)

is enrereo,

tr

feed is not performecl

after thc piunclr

o;xl'atiorr"

!f tltis

ollerand is

omitted,

tlre status of the

feeclr,ro fueci

bit in

the

Dl-F is not changed.

STACKR-nurnber

specif

ies

the stacker to be Lrsed

fcr tlris

oper'<ition.

lf this

operarrd

is omrtted,

the valtre <-rf the

staci(cr-select byte irr t.ire tJTt- is not ciianged.

FLlltlCHL-nunber

specifies the

nurnber

of colrrrnrrs to prrrrch

lf t.his operand is

omittecl, the

value irr

the

ptrnr:h.lerrgth

byre is not changed. Thrs operand shouici f,,e

rrsed

with t-lrr

MFCM

or 1442 only.

PRINTL-number indicates the number

of columrrs ll l;e

printed

by each head on the

MFCI\4.

lf this operand is

omitted, the value

in the print-length

byte

is not clranged.

Dt I

PR

PP

DT I- aiiilress

specif ies

the DTF for

this file.

address is

assLrrrrecJ to

tl-re address

of the leftmost byte oi

lf this

operand is not

entered,

the

be in

register

2.

IDEV-codel

[,D-fF-addressj

[,OPC-code]

t,DEFER-Y/Nl

[,PR

tNT4-Y/N]

t,FEED-Y/Nl [,STACKR-number]

[,PUNCH

L-number]

[,PR

I NTL-number]

[,PRHEAD-rnask]

[,ERR-address]

PRHEAD-mask defines

the MFCM print heads

selected.

The mask

must

be

specified

as

an eight

bit field. lf this

operand

is

omitted,

the current

setting

of the print head

selection

byte in the DTF is not modified. The following

chart

sl'rows

the meaning

of each

bit:

Meaning

Cand 1

=0 Unused,

must

be

zero

2 = 1 Select

print head

six

3 = 1 Select

print head five

4 = 1 Select

print head four

5 = 1 Select

print head

three

6 = 1 Select

print head

two

7 = 1 Select

print

head

one

ERR-address

supplies

the address in your program

where

control

is

passed

if the controlled

cancel option is

taken in

response

to a permanent

l/O error. lf this operand

is

omit-

ted, no code is

generated

to check for the controlled cancel

completion

code,

and

you should

check

the

return

code

in

your program

to determine

the outcome

of the operation.

Construct an lnterface for Reading, Punching, and Printing

Cards ($GPC)

The

$GPC

macro

instruction

generates

the interface

requirecl

to communicate

with card data

management

when a record

is

being read,

punched,

andlor

printed

on

a card device.

To

use this macro

instruction,

you must

construct

a card DTF

for the file

and use

the

$DTFO macro

instruction

to estab-

lish

the offsets

in the DTF. lf you will need

to use

the

data

in register

2 at a later

time,

you should

save

the contents

of

that register

before

issuing

the

$GPC

instruction.

You rlust

also

provide

labels for the necessary

data

management

rout-

ines

via EXTRN statements in

your program.

The nante

of

the data management

routine

for each

device is:

Module

Name

$$M

FF F

$$MM

F F

$$ARFF

Device

MFCU

MFCM

1442

The code

generated

by this macro instruction

gives

control

to the data

management

routine;

the routine comptetes

execution

and returns

control to the generated

code. lf the

ERR

or EOF

operand

is

specif ied,

the

generated

cooe

tests

the completion code returned

by data management

and

branches

to your routine.

DEV-code

specifies

tlre card device

desired. The possible

values

for this code are: MFCU, MFCM,

and 1442. lf this

operand is

not specified,

MFCU is the default value.

DTF-address

specifies the address

of the leftmost byte of

the DTF for this

fite. lf this

operand

is not entered, the

address

is

assumed to be

in reqister 2.

OPC-code specifies the operation code to be

used. Valid

codes and their

meanings

are:

Bit

Code

RD

PU

PR

PP

RPU

RPR

RPP

Meaning

Read only

Punch only

Print

only

Punch

and

print )

Read

and

punch I Not alow9d

Read

and

print I for MFCM

Read,

punch,

and

print )

lf this operand is

not specified.

the status

of tlre read/

punch/print

bits

in

the operation

code

is

not changed.

DEFER-Y/N specifies

whether to defer the punch and/or

print request. lf N (no) is specified

the request is

not de-

ferred; if this operand

is not specified the status of the

defer bit in

the DTF is not changed.

CARDI-Y/N specif

ies whether to perform a read

card image

operation on the 1442

or 2501. lf N (no)

is

specified

or if

this operand

is

omitted, a card-image

read is not performed.

PRINT4-Y/N specifies

whether to print three or four tiers

for a

print request from the MFCU. Y (yes)

indicates that

four tiers should

be

printed;

if this operand

is

omitted or if

N (no)

is

specif

ied, three tiers are

printed.

The

format

of the

$GPC

macro

instruction

is;

lNamel

| $GPC | [DEv-code] [,DTF-address]

[,OPC-code]

t.DEFER-Y/Nl [,CARDr-Y/N]

[.PRr

NT4-Y/N] t,FEED-Y/Nl

[,STACKR-number] [,READL'number]

[,PUNCHL-number] [.PRINTL-number]

[,PRH

EAD-mask]

[,EOF-address]

[,ERR-address]

32

FEED-Y/N specifies whether

or not to perform a

feed

operation after a 1442

punch operation. lf Y (yes)

is

specified

or if this operand is omitted, a

feed is

performed

after the punch

operation.

STACKR-number specifies the stacker to be used for this

card

operation. This operand

is not used

with the

2501. lf

this operand is not specified, the

byte containing

the

stacker

number

is

set

to X'00'.

READL-number specifies

the number

of card columns

to

read. This operand

should

be

used with the MFCM or

2501

only. lf this

operand

is not specified. the default value

is

80.

PUNCHL-number specifies the number of card columns

to

punch. This operand

should be used with the

MFCM

or

1442

only. lf this operand is not specified,

the default

value

is

80.

PRINTL-number

specifies

the

number

of columns

to print

per

head on

the

MFCM. lf this

operand is

not specified,

the

default value is

64.

PRHEAD-mask defines

the print heads

selected on the

MFCM. The mask must

be specified

as an

eight

bit field.

lf this operand is omitted.

the current

setting of the print

head

selection byte

in

the DTF is not modified. The fol-

lowing

table shows the meaning

of each

bit:

Bit

0and

1

=0

2= 1

3=1

4=1

5=1

6=

1

7=1

Meaning

Unused,

must

be zero

Select

print

head

six

Select

print

head five

Select

print

head four

Select

print head

three

Select

print head

two

Select

print

head

one

EOF-address

specifies

the address

in your program

that

receives

control when the end-of-f

ile is

detected. lf this

operand is not supplied, no code is

generated

to check for

the end-of-file

condition.

ERR-address

supplies

the address

in your program

where

control is

passed

if the

controlled cancel option is taken in

response to a

permanent

l/O error. lf this operand is omit-

ted, no code is

generated

to check

for the controlled cancel

completion code.

Note: lt ER R or EOF

addresses are

not

specified,

you

should check the return code in

your program

to determine

the outcome of the operation.

Printer

Support

This

section

describes the

macro instructions that support

the

printers.

The

following

functions

are

provided:

o Build a pre-open

DTF for a printer and assign

its offsets.

The

DTF provides

informatron to printer

data

manage-

ment routines

that perform

input/output operations.

o Build

the interface

needed to print

data.

Def ine the File for Printer ($DTFP)

The

DTF provides

information

needed to allocate,

open,

and access a printer. This macro instructiorr

generates

the

code that builds the

printer

DTF.

The

format of the $DTFP macro instruction is:

RCAD-address

is

a required operand

which gives

the address

of the leftmost byte of the logical

record.

IOBA-address

is a required operand specifying

the address

of the leftmost

byte

of the lOB. The IOB will be 50 bytes

long.

IOAA-address

is a required

operand

which specifies the

address

of the leftmost byte of the l/O area. For the 1403,

this

address

must define

the l/O area as

beginning ona 124'

byte boundarV. The length

of the l/O area

must be:

132 bytes

for

the 1403

printer

The record length

+7

for

the 3284

prirrter.

It\amel | $DTFP I RCAD-address,lOBA-address,lOAA-address,

OVFL-number,PAGE-number

[,DEV-code]

[,UP-mask1

tHUC-Y/N] [,CHN-addressl

[,PRlNT-Y/N] [,SKlPB-number] [SPACEB-

numberl [,SKlPA-number] [,SPACEA-number

[,RECL-number]

Macro Instruction

Statements 33

Ol/FL nttrnber

specifies

the line

number

orr

the

prrnter

alter

which

rhe overflow

completion

code

will be returned.

lf this

operand

is rrot

specified,

default

is made

to 6 lines

less

than

the rrrrrnber

specified

for the

pAGE

operand.

PAGE-number

specifies

the number

of lines

to print per

page.

lf this

operarrtl

is

rrot

specified,

default

is

made

to the

systenr

value

for the

nunrber

of lines

per

page.

DEV-code

str"recifies

tlre

printer

desired.

The

possible

values

fcrr

this code

are 1403

and

3284. lf this

operancl

is not

specifierl,

1403

is

assurned.

UP+nask

specif

ies the mask

to test

the eight

externar

inrlicators. The cor.le

f

or the LJP-mask

must be

specified

as 8 binary

bits. For

example,

to rest

bits

0,3, b,

and

7,

t,rou

worrld

enter [JP-10010101.

The Up-mask

is compared

to the extet'nal

intlicators

set on by the

SWITCH

statement

tor corrciitionally

eponl''rn files. lf the

bits that are on in

the

[JP-rnask

are

also on in

the external

indicators

set on by the

SWll CH

statetnenr,

the file

will be

opened. lf the Up-mask

is

all zeroes

or not used,

tlre file

will be unconditionallv

oper-red.

//ote.. Infornrarion

on setting

exterital

indicators

(SWITCH

statement) carr be found in the IBM System/3 Model ls

Systettt Cor',trol Programming Reference Manual for pro-

granr

Number 5704-SC1

, GC21-5077

and tBM SystemR

Model 15 Systent Control Programming Concepts and

Reference

Manrtal for Progranr

Number S7O4

SC2, GC2j..

5162.

HUC \'/Al

specif

ies

whether

to halt

if an urrprintable

charac-

ter

is

detected.

lf N (no)

is

specified

or if this

operand is

omitted,

no halt

occurs.

CHN-acJdress

indicates

the address

of the next DTF in the

chain

of DTFs. lf there is no DTF chain

or if this is

the

last

DTF in

a chain,

this

operand

should

be

omitted

(a

value

of X'FFt-F'is

assumed).

PRINT'\'/N spccifies

n,lrethcr

to perform

a

print

and

a skip

or

space

or.only

a sl<ip

or space. Default

is

N (no)

,

mean-

ir.rg

that a

print is rrot

performed.

SKIPB-nutnber

specif ies the lirre

to skip

to before

the print

operation.

lf this

opera|rd is

not

eiltered,

the default value

is zero.

34

SPACEB-number

specif ies

the number of lines

(maximum

of 3 lines)

to space

before

the print

operation. lf this

operand

is

not entered,

the default

value

is

zero.

SKIPA-ttuntber

specif ies the line

to be skipped

to after the

print

operation. lf this

operand is not specified,

the default

value

is zero.

SPACEA-nunrber

specifies

the number of lines

to space

(0,

1,2, or 3) after tlre

print

operation. lf this

operand is not

specified.

it defaults

to a

value

oI zero

if DEV-1403

is

speci-

fied

or to a

value

of one if DEV 3284 is

specified. A space

after

of zero

is

not allowed for the

3284

printer,

and,

if

zero

is

specified,

the operand

defaults

to a

space

after of

one.

RECL-number specifies the length

of the line

to be

printed.

lf this

operand is

omitted,

default is

132

positions.

Constnrct a Printer Pttt lnterface ($PUTP)

This rnacro

instruction

generates

the

interface

needed

to

communicate

with printer

data management.

You must

provide

a

DTF for the f

ile

and

use

the

$DTFO macro

instruction

to establish

the offsets in

the DTF. You must

also

provide,

through

an EXTRN statement in

your pro-

gram,

the

label

$$LPRT,

for the 1403, or $$lpfUp,

for the

3284. (Tlrese

labels

are

for the

printer

data

management

nrodule

necessary

to perform

the

printer

output

opera-

tion.)

lf you will need

to use

thedata in register

2 at a later

time,

you should save

the contents

of that register

before

issuing

the

$PUTP

macro

instruction.

The code

gerrerated

by this macro instruction

gives

control

to the data management

routine. The

routine

completes

execution

and returns

control to the generated

code. lf the

ERR

operand is

specified.

the

generated

code

checks

the

completion

code for errors

and

branches to your error

routine

if errors

occurred.

l-he

fornrat

of the

$PUTP

macro

instruction

is:

INamel

| $PUTP

I IDEVcodel

[.DTF-addressl

t,pRtNT-Y/N]

[,SKlPB-number]

[,SPACEB-number]

lS

Kl PA-numberl [,SPACEA-number]

[,ERFi-addressl

[,OVF

L-address]

DEV-code

specif ies

the

printer

device

ciesrii:rl. The

possible Disk Device

support

values for

this code

are 1403

and3284. lf tnis operand is

not

specified,

1403 is the

default value. This

section

describes the

macro instructions that support

disk devices. The follorvirrg

f r-rnctions

are

1'lrovided:

DTF'address

specifies the address of the leftmost iryte

of o Builcl

a

pre,open

DTF for disk GE-f/PUT opcrations

the DTF for

this

file lf this

operand is not

entered,

the and assiqn

its

offsets.

address is

assumed

to be in reqister

2.

o Build

an inout/orrtrrut

block

(lOB)

for

disk

read/write

operations and assign

its

offscts.

PRINT Y/N specifies

whether

to perfrom

a

print

and

a skip

or space

or only a skip or space. lf this operand is not o Build

the

interfaces requirecl

to get

input recor-cls

from

a

specified,

the DTF remains

unchanged. disk device

via

a

get

or a

read.

r Build

the interfaces

required

to put output records

to a

SKIPB-nuntber

specifies the lir-re

to skip to before the

print disk device

via

a

put or a write.

operation. lf this operand is

not entered,

the DTF remair-ts

unchanged. o Build the interface t,l wait

for

disk completion.

The

disk DTFs

provide

information

to the disk data

man-

SPACEB-number

specifies the number

of lines

to space be- agement,

ancl

the disk lOBs

provide

information to the

fore

the

print

operation. lf this operand is not entered, the input/output supervisor routines that perform

the input

DTF remains unchanged. or output operations.

These

operations are

provided

through the disk support

macro instructions.

SKIPA-number

specifies the

line

to be skipped to after the The IBM 3340 Direct

Access

Storage

Facility

attaches

to

print

operation.

lf

this operand is not

entered,

the

DTF System/3

Models

158,

15C, and 15D. Also,

the

IBM 3344

remains

unchanged. Direct

Access

Storage attaches

to System/3 Model 15D.

Certain areas on the 3340 and 3344 disks are treated

as

SPACEA-number

specifies the number

of lines

to space

after 5444 disks. These

areas,

known as

simulation areas,

are

the

print

operation. lf this

operand

is

not entered,

the DTF used

for program

libraries and can also

be

usecl for data

remains unchanged. files.

These

areas cannot

contain multivolume

or inclexed

files.

The remainder

of the disk space, known

as

main

data areas. can onlv be used

for data

files.

ERR-address

supplies

the address

in

your program

where

control is

passed

if the controlled

cancel option is taken in Reference in this manual Io5444,5445, and 3340 are

to

response

to a

permanent

l/0 error. lf this operand is

omit- be interpreted according to which disk storage device(s)

ted, no code is

generated

to check for the controlled

cancel is

attached to the

system.

The following

table should be

completion

code, and

you s,hould check the return

code

in used to determine

the

rneaninq

of the reference:

your program

to determine the

outcome of the operation.

References

to D3

and

D4 Q-numbers

in

this manual mav be

replaced with D3

1 and

D41 for 5704-SC2.

OVFL-address

specif

ies

the address in your program

that

should

receive

control if page

overflow occurs.

Macro lnstruction Statenrents 35

Disk Device

SullPort

Page

of GC21-7608-2

lssued

28 March

1980

By TN L: GN21-5700

Reference

Model 15A

Meaning

Model 158 and

15C Meaning

Model 15D

Meaning

5444 5444 Disk Simulation Simulation

Storage area

on area

on 3340

Drive 3340 or 3344

5445 5445 Disk Main

data Main data

Storage area

on area on 3340

3340 or 3344

3340 Not Main

data Main

data

applicable area on 3340 area

on 3340

or 3344

For

Program

Number

5704

SC2,

there

are certain

restric-

tions

on where

the

DTFs

and

assdciated

fields

can

be located

relative

to 40K (X'E000')

in the user

partition:

o DTFs

must

be

located

such

that

the entire

DTF resides

at an

address less

than 40K for batch

disk files

speci-

fied

as

SHARE-YES

and

for

CCP disk

files.

. For

the following

disk

access methods

where

SHARE-

YES

is

specified,

the high

add key

and the high

prime

key

areas

(ADKEY parameter)

must

be

locateo

completely

below 40K:

- Indexed

output add

- Indexed

random

input

and add

Indexed

random

input,

update

and

add

o lf a

disk f

ile is

specif ied

with external

buffers,

then

the followirrg

must

be

located

completelv

below

40 K:

The

DTFs

- The

index lOBs

(lO

parameter)

- The master

track

index

(MSTX

parameter)

' The

space for

the multivolume

extent table

(lO

parameter,

M1

and

M2

definitions)

Define the File for Disk ($DTFD)

The DTF provides

irrformation

needed

to allocate,

open,

and access a f ile

on the

disk device.

This

macro instructior-r

generates

the code

that

builds

the disk DTF. See

Appendix

B: Define the File Control Blocks for a description

of the

pre-open

ancl

post-open

disk DTFs.

The format

of the

$DTFD macro instruction is:

tThese

parameters

are valid

only

f

or

Program

Number

5704-SC2.

AC+ode specifies the access method used for the

f

ile. This

operand is

required. The

codes and their meanings

are as

follows:

Code Access Method

CA

UL]

L(J

CU

UU

DO

DU

IA

ro

IS

ISA

ISL

ISU

ISUA

ISU

L

IR

IRA

IRU

I RUA

Consecutive

add

Consecutive

get

Consecutive

output

Consecutive update

Direct

get

Direct

output

Direct update

Indexed

add

Indexed

output

Indexed

sequential

get

Indexed

sequential add

lndexed

sequential

input with limits

I ndexed

sequential

update

Indexed

sequential

update and

add

Indexed

sequential

input update

with limits

Indexed

random

get

Indexed

random

add

Indexed

random update

Indexed

random

update

and add

RECL'number specif ies

the

decimal length of the

logical

record. This

operand

must be

specified.

NAME-f ile name specifies the name of the file. The name

must

be eight

characters

or less in length. This

operand

must

be soecified.

INamei

| $DTFD I AC{ode,RECL-number,NAME-filename,

B L K

L-number.lO-address

t,

D I s K

-E444ls

445

|

33401

[.UP-mask]

[,BUFNO-1/2]

t,MVF-N/Yl

[,LlM-N/Y] [,ORD-N/Y]

[,BtN-N/Y]

[,CHN-address]

[,RCAD-address]

[,E

NT-number]

[,MVFN-number]

[,K

EYL-number]

[,KEYD-number]

[,K

EYAgddress] [,MV

FT-address]

[,MSTX-address]

[,]

BLKL-number]

[,ADKEY-address]

[,EOVKeddress]

[,SHR.Y/N]' [,EXTBUF.Y/N]'

36

r:

I Access Method r l-irtttula i tspa.,e

in l1o areal

.-... _,_+._.,..-.._ _._

I Consecrtiue,

Direct {lll.

i(i. r J{J)

,.inrrt

iitr,:li0 :-r, I'm6rs

tst-!i:!..ritr

I

BLKL-number

specif ies

tfte nilrr-tber

of bvtes

in ttre irutfer.

The rrrinrrnurn

nur,.iber

can

oe

rjeterntirrl{t

as

fol',_r,rr.s.

rxcijirt

for the access methods

iisted

on the tolioi,r,,rir.j

paqlr:r,

fr)l

'vhich

the

minimum ilun'ii;er

of bytes r:256"

o lf tne recc,rd

lenllth rs less

trr;tn or :rilr...iti

to 2?6 :iriri

evenly

ciivisil-rlu,n1,r

256,

1l-re

Drr

ile!-

lr r;ql.il

is

;i:t-j

s lf fhe record ienilth

is

qreater

thar;

256 irrl{l d nii.jttrpie

of256, ti.re buffer iengt:h

is

equ;rl

to th,; r;.ccrii l::it;giir

.

0 if tfle ne(,{rril ieni;Iit 1.,

nLri iillLrj!iy

rji'u,:;il:i,,

i;ltii lt-jG alrj

nOl ii l-tttiriirls Of ?5e. tirl i.ir;f{1.1

ii:rrqiit ,.-

ine lnultip!C

of 256

that is

tharr

the

rilci.,,u

lr-,nutfr

irlur

255.

. lf the record lenqth

is an

odd rnuitipic

ol 128, tlre

luffer

shouid

be the record length

plus

12[3.

page

t:f GC21_76O9,2

tssued

29

September

1g7B

By

l'tJL: cN21-5649

Itlr-rr6f;

15.t* br-rffei lengths

are

niinimum

lengths. Larger

ir:rrgths

rrray

bc; specif:ed, but musi be in

multiples of 256.

-f

he

folir-r,'ving

access methods can

always

operate in

a

mini-

rrlu,tr

t-li.r .i'-'r,:'vtp

LUIter

Consr:lu

tive

outpul

Consecurive

add

Consecutive

oLrtput

nru

ltivolurne

Corr:Lrcuirve

adti mui tivolume

Corisecutive

input

Cr:,rsecutive

input inultivolunie

I|idexeri

ouiput

lritiexed

()utput

multivolume

,'(J-arlcdress

pl'ovides

tfre address

of the leftmost byte of an

area

irr main

storage

allocated to contain

all buffers

and

l{)[Js

tor the access method. f his

operand

must be speci-

iirri T iie

amount of nrain

storage

required

is

shown in the

tollowirrg

charl:

Formula

for External Buffers

on

0ption Statement

BLKL rrmes

UtiFNO

BLKL

+

256 times BUFNO

BLKL

+

512

2 times

Bt-KL

+

512

+

(256

times IBLKL)

BLKL.

! 512

+

\256

times IBLKL)

BLKL +

(256

times

lBl"-KLl

2 times

tiLKL +

2

times

{256

times IBLKL)

256

+

256

(BLKL)

Macro I nstrur:tion

Statements

l)isk Device

Support

Inclexed

Output ,l!!.i:.

l. , :,firi

r 6{)l rFnE! .'i trmes

Bt-jf:N0 r KEYL

'll'rill!',,ii-): r'.ii:

il. :irr M\,'

j 'u ilVF

indexed flandonr lriput, li \BLKr ' .:t) .

]v.t"d

, t1t /2 l:4, r.:t-:r,:r.

Indexed Randorn Inpul ancJ 1 1,.4

r

.

rryir.,r' \1, f] t:lr rinqle voirrrne iiles

Uptlate fo1

, i-j irt: ,,rrr_tl,r \,oiu:nr' ,,r'< it lj4 + NLYL tor rnrriri

M, 84 * K i yL i,rf .irullt- /oiunrs iilcrs

i5704-SC1)

',,,rir;fi

ltlg'.r

l!111,'!.tlL-li 1.',l li2 rKFyL.iormrrltr

:\rl

. :1'.;

L

't

r::r/, rr,,

:r:,,il-i ;olurne l!!cs

(5704-cC2'

' i,r

iti

r,!.

i ri,;: I

::7f)4-liC.:r

i

Inrlexeci Handom lrlput arid I rr:,r: liji_i..:-

r ll,, 1;lirF .t

44 , 1.,4

.

nrhere

Adcl.

or Indexed Random ,..tii; , 2b6 1i:rp! iF!

| i.:

i , L4. f.J

f

cr srnErt: \,rjiurl{: liles

Input, Updare.ant.l r\ctd 3r:r

+ ^l r.,rri,,., r..1

. l!(] i Kt:yi, tor rnurri

avl

_ i) lr.r :r

rrjrt ! (; ,rr[f] fi 1,\ Jr:)rutilli fi!{15

I\4- :1:,..

".t \

I r,:,

,,rr.

r'a)t."1:t,r

ltli,s

lnclexeci

AfJd iBll(i- ,-{{ri , r2ri8,

r 3iil

{wrthout irrput) +'J56 ',,'rr:s

rtiii

K ! . .l(.)

In(lelsd Se{.iuential lrip!f, ;i-ti.Ki i.l0r l?it: r:r:r|s

or lndexed Sequentiai tBLFi| li:i

lnput and Update

Indexed Sequential 2 tirrres il{t K

i..

. iJ0,

-

Input and Add, or 2 tirnes

('.lstj

tirnes

tBLFl.L

Indexeo Sequentr.r: l1l,{ji } Jill

tJpdate, antJ Add

indexed i.'qrrentiai/l[nirl itji.i. i. - -i,]; . ':.ilrl]

i .1i;r

ini,ur, t,l inr,'uxerj . zt,tj ,:;: l_.,t

'- 'i

;

Seuuclrtral.rl-rr:t

rtg

I nr:ui

and iJpdate

3'1

Page of GC21

-7608-2

lssued 29 September

1978

Bv

TNL: GN21-5649

DISK-5444/5445/3340 specif ies

whether the disk device is

the 5444 Disk Storage Drive,

the 5445 Disk Storage,

or the

3340 Direct Access

Storage Facility. lf this operand is not

specif ied,

5444 is

assumeq.

UP-mask

specifies

the mask

to test

the eight external

indicators. The code

for the UP-mask must be specified

as 8 binary

bits. Fclr

example,

to test bits

0,3,5, and 7,

you

would enter

UP-10010101. The

UP-mask is compared

to the

external indicators

set on by the

SWITCH statement

for conditionally

opening files. lf the bits

that are on in the

UP-mask

are also on in the external indicators

set

on bV the

SWITCH statement,

the f ile will be opened. lf the UP-mask

is

all

zeroes

or not used, the file

will be unconditionally

opened.

y'y'ofe.'

Information on setting

external indicators

(SWITCH

statement) can be found in the IBM System/3 Model 15

System Control Programmming Reference Manual (for

Program

Number

5704-SC1l, GC21-5O77,

and

in the IBM

System/3 Model l5 Control Programming Conceptsand

Reference

Manual (for Program

Numbr:r

5704 SC2).

GC21 5162.

EUFNO l/2 allows

you to specify either one

or two buffers

for the file. You can use

two buffers onlV with consecutive

access methods

and

indexed

output. All consecutive

access

methods

allow dual buffering

except

the consecutive up-

date

and consecutive update rnultivolume.

lf this

operand

is omitted

or if SFI

R-Y is specified,

one buffer is

assumed.

MVF N/Y specif

ies whether

the

access

methocl

is multi-

volume. lf this

operand

is

omitted, N (no)

is

assumed.

LIM-N/Y is specified only for indexed

sequentiai

get

and

indexed sequential update. lt specifies whether the sequen-

tial

access

is withrn limits. lf this operand

is

not entered,

N (no)

is

assumed.

ORD-N/Y specif

ies whether an ordered load is to be used

with the indexed output access method. This

operand

can

be specif

ied only with the indexed

output access method.

ORD Y must

be specif ied

for indexed

rnultivolume output

access methods. lf this operand is not enterecl,

N (no)

is

assumeci.

BIN-NN is specified only with the direct output, direct get,

and

direct update access

methods. Y (yes)

indicates direct

binary relative

record numbers;

N (no)

indicates

direct

deci-

mal

relative

record numbers. lf this operand

is omitted,

N

is

assumed.

CHN-address

specifies the address

of the next DTF in the

chain of DTFs. lf there is no DTF chain

or if this DTF is

the

last DTF in

the chain, this operand

should be omitted

and

X'FFFF'assumed.

RCAD-address

specifies the address

of the leftmost byte of

the logical record. lf this operand

is

not

entered, X'0000'

is assumed.

Depending on

the

disk access

method

being

used for an input operation,

either move

mode

or locate

mode is used. lf move mode is used, the record is

provided

at the address

specif

ied in the RCAD parameter.

lf locate

mode is

used, the address of the input

record is contained

at the displacement of $DF

LRA in the DTF.

The specified address

plus

the total length

of the area

must

be less than logical

X'E000'for f iles that

are

being

shared or for files that are

being used for external

buffers

(5704-SC2

onlv).

ENT-number specif ies

the number of entries in the master

track index. This

operand is specif

ied only

for indexed

random or indexed

add access

methods.

MVFN-number indicates the number

of volumes for a

multivolume

direct

access

method. This operand

must be

specif

ied

for these access

methods.

KEYL-number specifies the

length of the key f ield and

must be

used

for all

indexed access

methods, but no others.

The key

f

ield

length can

be no

more than 29

bytes.

KEYD-number is entered

for all indexed access

methods.

It indicates the displacement

into the

record of the

right-

most byte of the key f ield. The

displacement

of the

f irst

byte in the record

is zero,

the

second

byte is

one,

and

so

on.

?Q

KEYA-address

specif

ies

one of the following and is

a

required

operand

for these

access

methods:

. Main

storage

address

of the lef

tmost

byte

of the

kev

field

for indexed

random

access

methods.

. Main

storage

address

of the leftmost

bvte

of the relative

record

number

field

for direct

access

methods.

. Main

storage

address

of the leftmost

byte

of the save

area for current

and

last

keys

for indexeci

sequential

add

access

methods.

o Main

storage

address

of the leftmosi

hryte

of tne

save

area for high

and low keys for indexed

sequential

with

limits

access

methods

(LlM Y) The snecif

ied

address

plus

the

total length

of the

area must

be less

than

logrcal

X'E000'for f iles

that

are being

sharec.l

or for f iles

that are

being

used

for externat

buf{ers

(5704-SC2

onlv).

You must

allocate

the rnain

storage

space for the

f ields.

The

amount

of space

required

is:

. The

number

of bytes

in the

key field

for indexed

ran-

donr access

methods.

o 23 bytes

for direct

access

methods

with decimal

keys.

The

decimal

key is located

in

the rightmost

15

bytes

of

the f ield.

. 8 bytes for direct

access

methods

with binary

keys.

The

binary

key is located

in

the rightmost

3 bytes

of

the f

ield.

o Two times

the key length

for irrdexed

sequential

add

or

indexed

sequential

with limits

access methods.

The low

key

is located

in

the left

half

of the field;the

high

key in

the right

half.

MVFT-address

must

be

specif ied

for all multivolume

direct

files,

and only for the

access methods

used

with these files.

This

operand

specif ies

the

address

of the leftmost

byte of

the table

of extents

used for the access methods

used

with

these

f iles. You must

allocate

main

storage

space

for the

table. The

number

of bytes

allocated

must

be equal

to

seven

times

the number

of volumes

in

the f ile. ,,rVith

57O4-5C2,

if the multivolume

f

ile is

rcr be

sharetj,

the

number

of bytes

allocated

must

be ten

ttmes

the number

of volumes

in

the

f

ile. The

specif

ied

address

plus

the

total

length

of the area mLtst

be less

than loqlical

X,E000,tor

files

that

are

being

shared

or for files

that are bernq

used

for

external

buffers

(5704-SC2

onlv

).

Page

oi GC21-71608-2

lssued 29

Seotember

1978

Bv TN

L: G N21

-5649

MSTX-address

specif ies the

address

of the leftmost byte of

the master

track index

in mai:r

itor'age. This

operarro

must

be

specified for indexed randorn

and indexctl

add access

methods.

You must

allocate

space

in main

storage for the

master

track irrdex.

The

lr:ngth

of the mastei.track

index is

determined

by the following

formulas:

o For

singie

volume

random

access rnethods,

Length

= ENT (kev

length

+ 2i

a For

multivolume

randorn

access

methods.

Length

= ENT (keyiength

+ 2)

ENT must

be

equal io or greater

tlrarr

4.

The specified

address

plus

the total ierrqth

of the orea

,must

be

less

than logical

X'E000'for f iles

that are being

shared

or for files

that are being

used for external

buffers

(5704-SC2

onlv).

IBLKL-number specifies

the number clf

sectors in the index

buffer. This

operand

is used

only with indexed

access

methods. lf this

operand

is not specif

ieci.

one sector

is

assumed. For indexed

sequential

access

methods

wirh both

input

and

add, the

specified

index

buffer

size

applies to

both

the input index

Lruffer

and the

add index

buifer. For

indexed

random access methods,

the specified

br-rffer

size

applies

only to the

add index

buffer. Increasing

tfre size

oi

this

index

buffer

will increase

the eff iciency

o{ processing

for a

random

file"

ADKEY-address

specif ies

the addresr;

oi the leftmost bvte

of an area

used

to save the highest

key in the

primi-.

index

and the

highest

key in rhe

add

index. The

area

at this

dcl-

dress must

be

eciual in length

to 2

tirnes

KL:y i for

each vr.)l_

ume

used

by the file. l his

operand

is

requirrrJ

ior tr,r;exerl

add, indexed

random

input

and

add,

ancl iridexerl

r..rr.i{ii-irn

input,

update,

and

add access

methocis.

lt is iqnored

rt

specif ied

with other access

methods.

The

specif

iect

adclress

plus

the

total length

of the

area

must

be

less

than

loorcar

X'E000'for f iles

that are

being

shared

or for files

rhat

are

being

used

for external

buffers

(5704-5C2

onlv).

EOVKaddress specif

ies

the address

of the leftnrr:ist

byte oi

an area used

to save a key tf ir-rrce

end-cf-vol

.lme

is :;pec-

ified

(by

the HIKEY parameter

on the [:lLE

OCL

.;r;,te.

ment) for a

nrultivolume

indexed

output f ;lu "f

he

air;a at

this

address must

be equal in length

tu l,(

EY

i-. Th;s i,trer.

and is used

only when

the multivolurne

rndext.cj

outrr*i

access method

is used

and force

end-of.,roiunre

wiil Lre Lrserj

"f

he

specif ied

address

plus

fhe total lenEtlr o1

ihe area

must

be

less

than logicai

X'E000'for f

iles

th,.it afe iJeing

shared

or for f iles

that are beirrq

used for extr,,rn;rl br,rtfers

(5704-5C2

onlv).

Macro Instruct,on S:aremerrll 39

Pase

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued 29 September

1

978

By TNL GN2'l-5649

SHR-Y/N,

applicable

to Program

Number

5704-SC2

onlv,

allows

the user

to

specify

whether

or not

file

sharing is

permitted

on

the f ile. File

sharing

is

permittecl,

when

possible,

if this

parameter

is not

used,

EXTBUF-Y/N,

applicable

to Program

Number

5704 SC2

only, allows

the user

to have

external

buffers. lf this

para-

meter

is

not used,

external

buffering

does

not

occur.

Construct

a Disk Get lnterface ($GETE)

The

$GETD macro

instruction

generates

the interface

need-

ed

to communicate

with disk

data managemenr

when a

record

is

being

read from a disk file. To use

rhis macro

instruction,

construct

a disk DTF for the

file

and

use

the

$DTFO macro

instruction

to establish

the offsets 1or

tne

DTF. You must

also

provide

the labels

for the

necessary

data

management

routines

through EXI-R

N

statements

in

your programs.

The

names

of the data

management

mocl-

ules

and

the

functions

of the modules

are

shown in Figure

11. lf you will need

to use

the

data in

register

2 at a later

time,

you should

save the

contents

of that register

before

issuing

the

$GETD macro

instruction.

The

code

generated

bV

this

macro

instruction

gives

con-

trol to the

data management

routine;the

routine

corrrpletes

execution

and returns

control to the generated

co<je.

The

generated

code

tests

the cornpletion

cocles returned

bV data

management.

[Namel

|

$GETD

I llAc-codel I

| | I

tesaccoaetI

[,DTF-address]

[,ERR-address]

[,EOF-addressJ

[,N

FR-address]

[,LSTV-address]

[,NOKY-address]

AC-code

or EBAC-code

specif ies

the appropriate

access

method for the file. The EBAC-cctde

is for external buf,

fering

and is valid

only for Program

Number

5704 SC2.

One

of these

parameters

mLtst

be

specified.

The codes that must be used

for the AC-code and the

EBAC-code

parameters

are shown in Figure

11.

40

DTF-address

indicates

the address

of the leftmost byte of NOKY-address

supplies the address in your program

that is

the DTF for this file. lf this

operand is

not specified,

the to receive

coritrol under either

of the

following

conditions:

address is

assumed

to be in register

2.

o The requested

key is too low for the current volume

when

processing

an

indexed

random

offline multivolume

ERRaddress supplies

the address

in your program

where file.

control

is

passed

if the controlled

cancel

option is

taken

in

response

to a

permanent

l/O error. lf this

operand

is omit- o The requested

key is too high for any

volume

when

ted, no code is

generated

to check for the

controlled

cancel processing

an

indexed random

online multivolume file.

completlon

code.

This

operand is not used with other access methods.

EOF-address

specifies

the address in your program

that

receives

control when the end-of-file

is

detected. lf this Construct

a Disk

put lnterface ($pUTD)

operand is

not supplied,

no

code is

generated

to check for

the

end-of-file condition. You must

not use

this operand The

$pUTD macro

instruction

generates

the interface

need-

with random or direct access

methods' ed to communicate

with disk data management

when put-

ting a

record

to disk

or updating

a

previously

retrieved

Note: lI ERR

or EOF

addresses

are not specifieo,

you record. you must

provide

a DTF for the

file

and

use

the

should check

the return

code

in

your program

to determine $DTFO macro instruction

to establish

the offsets in

tne

the

outcome

of the

operation. DTF. You must

also

provide,

through

EXTRN statements

in

your program,

the labels

of the disk data management

modules necessary

to perform the output operation (see

NRF-address

must be used

only

for random

and direct Figure

11). lf you will need

to use

the data in register

2 at

access

methods. lt specifies

the address

in your program a later time, you should save the contents

of that register

that is

to receive

control when

a

no-record-found

condition before issuing

the

$pUTD macro instruction.

occu

rs.

LSTV-address

is used when processing

a random, offline,

multivolume

file. This

operand

supplies

the

address

in

your

program

which receives

control when the requested

key is

too high

for the

f inal

volume

in

a

multivolume

file.

Macro

lnstruction Statements 41

Disk Device

Support

$GETD I $PUTD

Page

of GC21-7608,2

lssued

29

September 1978

BV

TN

L. GN21-5649

X

x

X

x

v.

X

x

X

Y

X

x

X

x

X

i(

X

M

L

tvl

M

L

;

M

L

M

rJl

M

CAM

.C

CGM

IRM

IRU

IRUA

IRUM

IS

ISA

ISAM

ISB

I\4

iSL

ISM

tsu

ISU L

ISUM

ISUA

ISLM

ISUB

ISC

ISCM

ISUC

ISUD

CA5

CAM5

CG5

CGIVIS

co5

COM5

nt t6

CUM5

DG5

DGA5

DGAMS

DGMS

DO5

DOA5

DOAM5

DOM5

DU5

DUA5

DUAM5

DUIVIs

lA5

IAM5

to5

toM5

rR5

IRA5

IRAM5

IR

BM5

IRM5

IIJR 5

IR UA5

IRUM5

rs5

ISAS

ISAM5

ISMB5

ISL5

ISM5

ISU5

ISU L5

ISUM5

ISUA5

IS LM5

ISU85

ISC5

ISCIVI5

ISUCS

ISU D5

S$CSOP

$$csoM

$$CS

I

P

$$cs i

M

SSC

I'OP

S$CF

()

M

S$CFIP

SSCi:

IM

$$CFOP

$$CF0M

$$CF

UP

$$CF

U N,4

S$D

F

It)

$$DFiB

$$D

F

tr

$$DF

IM

$$D

F U L')

$$D

F

Ui]

$$DFLJT

$$DFUM

$$DFUt)

SSII

F

Uts

$$DFUI'

SSD

F

U

I\4

s$ir-AD

$$tFAf\.4

SSIFUT

$$ rF

ri r.4

$$i.itP

S$

IGA D

$$

lGAll

s$rGBtu]

$$tcitM

$s t(l l.l

P

$s t(:,

ti A

$$ti,iJM

$$ |

r'l ll''

ii$

riiAt.;

9$

lHA,\,4

S$IHtsfu1

SSIHIL

l;$lsHl!\4

$SttiUP

S$IHIJL.

S$IHLJM

$srflLiA

s$ ilJ

tiJ

$$IHUI]

S$

iH

IC

SS tt-l i t)

$siii-rucl

$$ri{uil

nn

coM

CU

CUM

DG

DGA

DGAM

DGM

DO

DOA

DOAM

DOM

DU

DUA

DUAM

DUM

IA

IAM

to

toM

IR

IRA

IRAM

IRBM

$$csoP

$$CSOM

$$CSUP

$SCSUM

$$tl

A tD

$SDAIB

$SDA

IT

$$DAIM

$$DAUD

$$DAUB

$$DAUT

$$DAUM

$SDAUD

$St]AUB

$$DAUT

$$DAUM

$sroAD

$sloAM

$$

rour

$$rouM

Jilxrr

$srRArl

$$

rFr AM

$$IRBM

$$

!H

lM

$$rriuP

$$

IF] UA

$SlRtJM

$$

ls li'

$$

rsA ri

$$ISAM

$SISBM

.SSrSrL

$$

lS llvl

$S

ISU

P

$$ISU

L

S$ISUM

$$

ISUA

$$rsrB

s$rJUt

$$

rs rc

bbt>tLJ

$$ISUC

$$ISUD

Consecutive Add

Cor)sccutive

Add Multivolume

Consecutive Get

Consecutive Get MVF

Consecutive

Output

Consecutive

Output MVF

[)onsecutrve Update

Consecuiive

Update MVF

Drrect Grrt

Direct Get iBinary Keys)

Dirt;cl

Get (Binarl,Keys)

MVF

i)rrect Get MVF

[)irr]ct

Output

Drr0ct Output (Binary Keys)

DirecL

Output (Binary Keys) MVF

Lirr,rct

Output MVF

Dirt-.ct

Update

Drrect Update (Binary Keys)

[-irrect

Update (Brnary Keys) MVF

l);r1.r Update MVF

lndr:xe-d Add

lrtdexed Add IVIVF

l'rciexed

Output

lnde:<r:d Output MVF

indexr:d Random lnput

lfr(l{rx.rd Random Add

lrrlured

Random Add MVf

Indoxed Random Update & Add MVF

lndexed Random Input MVF

lrrdexed Randorn Update

inrlexed Random Update & Add

inrlexerl

Randorn Update MVF

in(li.xed

Sequential Input

i rrrltrr:cj

Serluential Add

ir;rlexed

Sequential Add MVF

l;rrlr:xed

Sr:que

nlral Update & Add MVF

i. ilt

red Secluential Input Within Limits

ii'rlr:xt:ci

Scquerrtial Input MVF

ir,rl',x(-,d

Sequential Updatr:

lrrj.agli Sequentrai Update Within Limits

lrrrjexed

Sequential Uf:tlate

MVF

irrrJexed

Sequential Update & Add

lrrcirxld Serluential Input Within Limits l\/VF

!nrli:xed

Sequential Update Within Limits MVF

i,rrlr:xi:d serluential Input within changeable Limits

lrrrJcxed

Secluerntial

Input Within Changeable Limits MVF

ir)iiexec,

Sequential

Update Within Changeable

Limits

lrrdexed

Secluential

Llpclate Within Chanqeable Limits MVF

Figure 11 (Part 1 of 2i. Disk [)ata Management Modules yvithout Exterrral Bulferinq

42

$GETD $PUTD AC-code

5444 I 5445

Move/

Locate

Mode

System Module

5444 | 5445 Access Method

X

CAM

CG

CGM

co

COM

CU

CUM

DGA

DGAIVI

DGM

DO

DOA

DOAM

DOIVI

DU

DUA

DUAM

DUM

IA

IAM

to

roM

IR

IRA

IRAM

IRBM

IBM

IRU

IRUA

IRUM

IS

ISA

ISAM

ISBM

ISL

ISM

ISU

ISU L

ISUM

ISUA

ISLM

ISUB

ISC

ISCM

ISUC

ISUD

cA5

CAMS

CG

M5

LU5

COM5

CU5

CUM5

DG5

DGA5

DGAM5

DG IVIs

DO5

DOA5

DOAM5

DOM5

DU5

DUAS

DUAM5

DUM5

rA5

IAM5

to5

roM5

tR5

IRA5

IRAM5

IRBM5

tR

tvl5

IUR5

IRUA5

IRUM5

ts5

ISA5

ISAM5

ISMB5

ISL5

tsM5

ISU5

ISU L5

ISUM5

ISUA5

ISLMS

ISUB5

ISC5

rscM5

ISUC5

ISUD5

M

I\4

M

$$wsoP | $$wFoP

$$wsoM i $$vrFOM

$$wsrP i $$wr

re

$$\rJStr\,1

l$$wFtM

$$wsoP | $$wFoP

$$wsoM | $$wFoM

$$"^'/SUP

I$$WFUP

s$v\su\,1

isswruna

$$YArD | $$Yr,tD

$$YArB | $$YFtB

$$YArr | $$YF

tr

s$YArM | $$YF

tM

$$YAUD | $$YFUD

$$YAUB | $$YFUB

$$YAUr | $$YFUr

$$YAUM

I $$YFUM

$$YAUD

$SYAUB

$$YAi-JT

$$YAUM

$$XOAD

S$XOAM

SSXOUT

$$xo{-JM

$$XR IP

S$XRAD

$SXI]

AM

$$XRBM

$SXI]

IM

$SXR

UP

$$XR

UA

$$XR

UM

$sxs

I

P

$SXSAD

$SXSAM

$SXSBM

$$XS

I L

$SXS

I M

$SXSUP

$SXSU L

$SXSUM

$SXSUA

$SXS

I B

$$XSIJB

$SXSIC

$SXSID

$$XSUC

SSXSUD

$$YFUD

$$YF

UB

olYFUl

$$YF

UM

S$XFAD

$$XFAM

)sArut

$$XF

UM

$$XG

IP

$$XGAD

$$XGAIVI

$$XGBM

$$XG

IM

$$XG

UP

$$XG

UA

$$XG

U

M

$$X

H

IP

$$X

HAD

$SX

HAM

$$X

HBM

$$XHIL

$$XSH

IM

$$X

H UP

$SXHUL

$$X

H

UM

$$xl-JLiA

$$XHIB

$$XHUB

$$X

H

IC

$$XHID

$$XHUC

$sx H

r.rD

Consecutive

Add

Consecut ive

Add Multivolunre

Consecutive Get

Corrsecutive Get MVF

Consecutive Output

Consecuttve Output IMVF

Consecutive

Update

Consecutive

Update

MVF

Direct

Get

Direct Get

(Binary

Keys)

Direct

Get

(Binary

KeVs) MVF

Direct Get

MVF

Direct

Output

Direct

Output (Binary

Keys)

Direct Output (Binary

Keys) MVF

Direct

Output MVF

Direct

Update

Direct

Update

{Binary

Keys)

Direct

Upclate

{Binary

Keys)

MVF

Drrect

Update MVF

Indexed Add

irtdexed Add MVF

Indexed Output

lndexed

Output MVF

Indexed Random

lnput

Indexed Random

Adci

Indexed

Random

Add MVF

Indexed Random Update & Add IVIVF

Indexed

Random input MVF

Indexed Random

Update

Indexed Random Update & Add

lndexed Random

Upclate MVF

Indexed

Sequential Input

Indexed

Sequential Add

Indexed

Sequential Add MVF

Indexed

Sequential Update & Add MVF

Indexed

Sequential

Input Within

Limits

Indexed

Sequential Input

MVF

Indexed

Sequentiai Update

lndexed

Sequential Update

Within

Limits

Irrdexed

Sequential Update MVF

Indexed

Sequential

Update

& Add

Indexed

Sequential Input

Within

Limits MVF

lndexrd

Sequential

Updatr: Wrthin

Limits MVF:

lndexecl

Sequcntial

Input Within

Changeable

Limirs

Indexed

Sequential

Input Within

Changeable Limits

filVF

lrrclexed

Sequential

Update

Wrthtn

Changeable

Lirnits

lriclexecl

Seouential

Update

i'\i ithin Changeable

Limits MVF

Figure

11 lPart

2 of 2). Disk

Data Management

Modules With External Buffering (5704-SC2

onlyl

Page

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued

29 September 1

978

Bv TNL: GN21-5649

\1alo Instructr0ri

Slatements 4

Page

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued 29

September 1978

Bv TNL: GN21-5649

The code

generated

by this macro

instruction gives

control

to the data management routine;

the routine

completes

execution

and returns

control to the generated

code. Com-

pletion

codes are tested and control is returned

to Vour

program.

The format

of the

$PUTD

macro instruction

is:

AC+ode or EBAC-code

specif

ies

the appropriate

access

method for the file. The

EBAC-code

is for external buf-

fering

and

is valid

only

for Program

Number

5704.SC2.

One of these

parameters

must be

specified.

The codes that must be used for the AC-code and

the

EBAC-code

parameters

are shown

in Fiqure

1 1.

DTF-address

specif

ies the address

of the DTF associated

with this

file. lf this operand

is not specified, the address

is assumed to be in register 2.

ERR-address

supplies the address

in your program

where

control

is

passed

if the

controlled cancel option is taken in

response

to a

permanent

l/O error. lf this

operand

is

omit-

ted,

no code is

generated

to check

for the controlled

cancel

completion code.

EOX-address

supplies the address

in your program

that is

to

receive

control

when

an end

of extent

is reached during

the

operation.

This

operand

is entered only when

creating a

consecutive or indexed

file

or when

records are to be added

to the

file.

DUP-address

provides

the address

in your program

that is

to

receive

control

when

an

attempt

to add

a duplicate

record

has

occurred.

This

operand

is used only with an add access

method.

[Namel

| $PUrD

I ltAc{ode] t

| | ileenccoael\

[,DTF-address]

[,ERR-address]

[.EOX

-address]

[,DUP-address]

[,SERR-address]

[,KERR-address]

t,UPD-Y/Nl [,LSTV-address]

[,NOKY-address]

[,HKER-address]

44

SERRaddress is

the address

in your program

where control

is

passed

in

the event

of a sequence

error

while loading

an

indexed

file.

KERR-address

specifies

the address

of Vour routine

to be

called

when

an attempt has

been

made

to update

a

recoro

in

an

indexed

f ile

and

the attempt

would

destroy

the

record

keV.

UPD-Y/N indicates

whether

an update is

to be performed.

lf this

operand is not

entered,

N (no)

is

assumed.

LSTV-address

specif ies

the address in your program

that

receives

control when a requested

key is too high

for the

last

specified volume.

This

operand is

used onlv

when

processing

an indexed,

random,

offline,

multivolume f ile.

NOKY-address

supplies

the address

in your program

that is

to receive

control

under

either

of the followinq

conditions:

o The

requested

key is

too low

for the current

volume

when

processing

an

indexed,

random,

offline.

multi-

volume

file.

. The

requested

key

is

too high

for any

volume

when

processing

an indexed

random

online

multivolume

file.

This

operand is not used

with other access

methoos.

HKER-address

specifies

the address in your program

that is

to receive

control when an indexed

sequential

add multi-

volume is

attempted

and the requested

key is higher

than

any key presently

in

the

file,

but lower

than

the highest

permissible

key.

lnput/Output Block for Disk ($IOBD)

This macro instruction

generates

a

disk input/output block

(lOB)

for use

by the disk input/output

supervisor.

A 30-

byte IOB is

generated

tor 5444,5445, and 3340 disk

devices. For

a detailed

description

of the disk lOB,

see

Appendix C: Disk lnput/Output Block.

The format

of the

$IOBD macro instruction

is:

[Namel

| $roBD I lDtsK-94441s445l334o]

[,cyL-number]

[.SCTR-number]

[,H

EAD-number]

[,NUM-number] [.BUFF'address]

[,O-number] [,ERREC-lOS/USER I

t.LOG-Y/N1

[,VER

Y/N] [,CHN'address]

Pase

of GC2

1

-7608,2

lssued

28 March

1980

By TN

L: cN21-5700

DISK 5444/5445/3340 specifies whether

the disk device

being used is

the 5444

Disk

Storage Drive Model

1,5445

Disk

Storage,

or the 3340 Direct

Access Storage

Facility. lf

a device is

not specif

ied,5444

Disk Storage

Drive Model

1

is

assumed.

CYCL-number

indicates

the beginning

cylinder to be

accessed.

You can

specify the cylinder

by a decimal num-

ber

(0-199)

or a

hexadecimal

number

(X'00'X'C7'). lf

this

operand is not entered, X'FF' is

assumed.

You must

then

insert

the correct

number

into

the IOB

before

performing

the input/output

operation. This

can

be done

throuqh the

macro

used

to initiate

the llO operation.

SCTR-number

specif ies the first sector

to be accessed. The

number

specified must

be

a

decimal

from 1

through 48 for

the

5444

disk drive, from i through 20 for the 5445 disk

storage,

or from 1 to 48 for the 3340

disk drive. lf this

operand

is not entered

, X'FF' is

assumed. You must

then

insert

the correct

number before

performing

the input/

output operation.

You can specify

the

sector through the

$RDD

and

$WRTD

macro

instructions.

HEAD-number is specified

only for the 5445 or 3340 disk

storage drives. lt specif ies

the

head

to be

used

with the

cylinder

and

sector

when

an l/O operation is

performed.

The number

specified

may

be

decimal

(0-'l

9) or hexa-

decimal

(X'00'-X'13') lf

this

operand is

omitted, X'FF'

is assumed

and the

value must

be

updated

when

the liO

operation is

performed.

NUM-number specif ies

the number

of sectors used. You

may

specify

the number in

either

decimal

or hexadecimal

form. lf this

operand is not entered,

one sector is

assumed.

BUFF-address

is

the address

of the leftmost byte of your

data

area. lf

this operand is omitted,

X'FFFF'

is assumed,

and

you must

update

the IOB

before

performing

the input/

output operatton.

Q-number

specifies

the drive on which the record

is located.

'You

may

specify

the

disk

drive

alone

F1,

R1, F2,

R2,

D1,

D2, D3/D31, D32,

D33, D34,

D4/D41,

D42,

D43, and

D44,

or you may

specify

the

hexadecimal

O-code in

the form

O-X'nn',

where

nn is

a

valid

hexadecimal

O-code. The

valid O-codes

are shown

in Figure

12. lf you specify

only

the

disk

drive,

you must

set the reacr/write bits

(the

last four bits of the Ocode) before

you can

perform

the l/O operation. This

can be done

through the

$RDD

or $WRTD

macro

instructions.

Note: D31.

D32, D33, D34,D41,D42,D43,

and

D44

are

for 5704-SC2

only.

Macro

Instruction

Statements

Disk

Device

Support

a3

vo

Operation

O-Byte

Settinq

(Hex)

Drive

1Drive

2Drive

3Drive

4

5444 Removable

Disk

Control AO BO

Read A1 B1

Write A2 B2

Scan A3 B3

5444

Fixed

Disk

Control A8 B8

Bead Ag B9

Write AA BA

Scan ND BB

5445

Disk

Control CO CB DO DB

Read C1 C9 D1 D9

Write C2 CA D2 DA

Scan C3 CB D3 DB

Figure

12. O-Byte

Hexadecimal

Settingsr

ERREC

IOS/USFF

indicates

whether

the

input/output

supervisor

is

to handle

error recovery.

lf you

specif

y lOS,

the

supervisor

handles

error

recovery

and retries

the opera-

tion when

errors

occur.

lf you

specify

USER,

the

supervlsor

does not retry

the operation

and returns

control

to you. lf

this

operand

is not

specified,

IOS

is

assumed.

LOG Y/N indicates

whether

the l/O supervisor

is

to log

errors

that occur

during

the

operation.

lf you

specify

y

(yes),

error

conditions

are logged

on

the

sVstem

pack. This

information

is

used

by lBlVl

customer

errgineers.

lrl

(no1

indicates

no logging

is

to be done

for

this lOB. lf this

oper_

and is not entered, Y is

assumed.

VER-Y/N is

used for output operations.

Y (yes)

irrdicates

the

written

data

shoulci be verified;N

(no)

indicates

it

should not. lf this

operand is

omitted, Y is

assumed.

CHN-address

specif ies

the address

of thr: leftmost byte of

the next

IOB

for

the operation if more

than one IOB

is

req

u i red.

- Figure

12

applies

only to57O4-5C1.

For

5704-SC2,

you

can

specify

only the disk

drive

(F1,

R1, etc.)

wirh

the

O

paramerer.

and read/wriie

bits are

set

with gFl

DD

or

gWRTD.

lnput/Output Block Offsets ($

lO E D

)

This

macro

instruction

generares

equates

to establish

labels

for the disk

lOBs. These

labels

are

offsets from the

begin-

ning

of the

IOB

and

are

used

as displacements

from

the be-

ginning

of the IOB

when

you wish

to i-efer

to one

of the

fields.

The

labels

generated

by this

macro

instructron

are

given

with the

f

ields

of the IOB in

Appendix

C. Disk

lnput/Output

Block. f o avoid duplicate

labels, you should

use

this macro

instruction

only

once in

a

program.

The format

of

the

gIOED

macro

instruction

is:

$IOED

Read from Disk (gRDD)

This

macro

instruction generates

an interface

to the disk

input/output

supervisor

that is

to read fronr

tlre

disk

device

When

using

this

macro

instruclion, you

must:

o Provide

an

IOB

and use

the

$IOED

macro

instructrorr

to

establish

the

offsets

in

the lOB.

o Wait

for

the

completion

of the input

operation

(using

$WAIT).

o Check

for end

of extent

when

the record

is received

completion

code

of X'70'

($CpEOX)

at

$DFCMp

in

the

DTF.

lf both reading

and

writing

for a

program

are

to De

per-

formed

usrng

a single

lOB,

the

bits

of the O-byte

are

attered

to indicate

ar-r invalid

operation. In

this case,

you must

set

off the

bits of the O-byte

for all but

the

first

reacl

(or

write)

operation

in

the

proqram.

lf

you

will

need

to use

the data

in register

1 at

a later

time,

you

should

save

the contents

of that register

before

issuing

tlre

SRDD macro

inslruction.

The fornrat

'-ri

the

$RDD macro

instruction

is:

lNamel I $tlDD I IOB-address,CS-address,NSECT-number

[,D

ls

K-544415

44513340]

4b

IOB-address

provides

the address

of the leftmost byte of

the IOB

which

you

created

through

your

gIOBD

macro

Instruction.

The

label

provided

must

be the

same

as the

name

specified

on

your

$IOBD

macro

instructiorr.

CS-address

is

the address

of the rightmost

byte of the main

storage

area

containing

the disk

cylinder/sector

address

of

the

area

you want

to read.

The

cylinder/sector

address for

use with rhe

5444

is

a two-byte,

hexadecimal

number. The

first

byte

specifies

the

cylinder;

the

second

specifies

the

sector. For use

with the 5445,

or 3340, a three-byte

hexa_

decimal

disk

address is

provided

tlrrough

this

entry. The

first

byte

specifies

the

cylinder;

the

second,

the head

number;

the third,

the

sector.

NSECT-nunber

indicates

the lrexadecimal

number

of sectors.

mrnus

one,

to be read

in

this

operation.

DISK-5444/5445/3340 specif ies

whether

the operation is

on a5444, a5445,

or a

3340

disk drive. lf this operand

is

omitted,

5444

is assumeo.

Write to Disk ($WRTD)

This macro

instruction

generates

an

interface

to the disk

input/output

supervisor

needed

to write

records

to disk.

Wherr

you

use

this macro

instr.uction, you

must:

. Provide

an

lOB,

and use

the

$IOED

macro

instructron

to

establ

ish

the

offsets

in the lOB.

o Wait for

the completion

of

the

output

operation

(using

$WAIT).

lf both reading

and writing for a

program

are

to be

performed

using

a

single lOB,

the

bits of

the O-byte

are

altered to indicate

an invalid

operation.

In this

case,

you

must

set off the

bits of the O-byte

for all but the

first

read

(or

write)

operation in

the

program.

lf

you

will need

to use

the dala in

register

1

at

a

later

time,

you

should

save the

contents of

that register

before

issuing

the macro instruction.

The format

of the

$WRTD

macro

instrucrion

is:

INarnel

I SWRTDI IOB-address,CS-address,NSECT-number

[,D

l sK-5444/5

445

I 3340]

Page

of

GC21-7608-2

lssued

28 March

1980

By TNL:

cN21-5700

IOB-address provides

the

address

of the disk

IOB for this

operation.

The

address is

the name

specified

oir

the

macro

instructiorr.

CS-address

is

the address

of the rightmost

bVte of the main

storage

area

containing

the disk

cylinder/sector

address

of

the area

to which

you want

to write. The

cvlinder/sector

address for use

with the

5444 is

a two-byte hexadecimal

number. The f

irst

byte

specif ies

the

cylinder;

the second

specifies

the sector. For use

with the 5445 or the 3340,

a three-byte

hexadecimal

disk

address

is

provided

through

this

entry. The

f

irst

byte

specif ies

the

cylinder;

the

second.

the head

number;

the third,

the

sector.

NSECT-number

specifies

the hexadecimal

number

of disk

sectors, mtnus

one,

to be wfltten.

DISK-5444/5445/3340 specif ies whether

the operation

is

on

a 5444,

a 5445, or a

3340 disk drive. lf this operand

is

omitted, 5444 is

assumed.

Wait for Disk IOS Completion ($WAtT)

This macro

instruction

is used

with

the

gRDD

and

$WRTD

macro

instructions.

lt generates

the

code

that

allows

you

to wart for

completion

of the disk

IOS

operation.

You

pro-

vide the label

of the

associated

IOB

and an

address

ro recerve

control in

the event

of an error.

lf you

will

need

to use

the data in register

1

at

a

later

time,

you should

save the

contents

of that register

before issuing

the

$WAIT macro

instruction.

The

format

of the

$WAIT macro

instruction

is:

INarn"ll SWAII I llOB-labell ,FRR-adrlrpss'

IOB-label

is

the name

assigned

to the IOB in

the

gIOBD

macro instruction.

This same

IOB must have

previously

been

specif ied in

either

a

$RDD

or

$WRTD

macro

instruc-

tion. lf this

operand

is not entered,

the

address

is

assumed

to be

in regist€r

'l

.

ERR-address

specif ies

the address

of the routine

rn

your

program

that

handles

errors detected

in

the

operation.

lf

this operand

is not

entered, no

error

checking

is

performed,

and

you should

check

the

return

code in

your program

to

determine

the

outcome

of the operation.

Macro

I

nstruction

Statements

Disk

Device Support

41

a

3741 Device

Support

This

section

describes

the macro

instructions

thar

support

the

directly

attached

3741

Data

Station

Model

1

or 2 or

Programmable

Work

Station

Model

3 or 4. The followino

functions

are

provided:

o Build

a

pre-open

DTF and

assign its

offsets.

Build

the interface

required

to read

input

records

from

the 3741

device

via

a GET.

Build

the interf

ace required

to write

output records

to

the 3741

device via

a

PUT.

The DTFs

provide

information

to the data

managemenr

routines

that perform

the input/output

operations.

The

interfaces

to these

operations

are

provided

through the

3741

macro

instructions.

Define the File for 3741 ($DTFK)

The

DTF provides

information

needed

to allocate,

open,

and access

a

file

on the

3741. This

macro

generates

the

DTF for this

purpose.

The format

of the

$DTFK macro

instruction

is:

INamei

| $DTFK | ruAME-titename,RECL-number,lO-address

t,AC--L/Ol

[,RCAD-address]

[,BUFNO-i/2]

[,CHN-address]

[,UP-mask]

NAME-filename specif ies

the name

of the f ile. The name

must

be eight

characters

or less

in length.

This

operand

must

be specif ied.

RECL-number

specifies

the decimal

length

(from 1

to 128)

of the logical

record.

This

operand

must

be specified.

lO-address

provides

the address

of the leftmost byte of an

area in main

storage

that contains

the

buffers

and the lOB.

This

operand

must

be specified.

The

amount

of srorage

must

be the record

length

plus

26

times

the BUFNO.

AC-l/O specif

ies whether

the DTF is

input

or output. lf

this operand

is not

specified,

input

is

assumed.

RCAD-address

specifies

the address of the leftmost byte

of the logical

record. lf this

operand is

not entered,

X'FFFF'is

assumed.

48

BUFNO-l /2 allows

you to specify either

one

or two buf-

fers. lf this

operand is

omitted,

one buffer

is

assumeo.

CHN-address

indicates

the address of the next DTF in the

chain

of DTFs. lf there

is

no DTF chain,

the operand is

omitted

and X'FFFF'is assumed.

UP-mask

specif ies

the mask

to test

the eight external

indicators.

The

code for the UP-mask

must

be

specified

as 8 binary bits. For

example,

to test bits

0, 3, 5, and 7,

you

would

enter

UP-l0010101.

The

UP-mask is

comoareo

to the

external indicators

set on bV the SWITCH

statement

for

conditionally

opening files. lf the bits

that

are on in

the

UP-mask

are

also

on in

the external

indicators

set on bv the

SWITCH

statement,

the file

will be

opened. lf the UP-mask

is

all zeroes

or not

used,

the file willbe

unconditionallv

ooeneo.

/Vofe. lnformation

on setting

external indicators

(SWITCH

statement)

can be found in the IBM System/3 Model lS

System Control Programming Reference Manual (Ior

Program

Number

5704

SC1). GC21

-5017.

and

tBM

System/3 Model l5 System Control programming Concepts

and Reference

Manual (for Program

Number 5704-SC2).

G

C2

1

-51

62.

Construct 3741 Get lnterface ($GETK)

The

$GETK macro

instruction

generates

the

interface

need-

ed to communicate

with the 3741

data management

when a

record

is

being read from the 3741 . f o use

this macro

instruction,

construct

a 3741 DTF for the

f

ile and

use the

$DTFO macro

instruction

to establish

the offsets for

the

DTF. You must

also

provide

an

EXTRN statement

with

the

label

$$CPIP

to use

this macro. lf you will need

to

use

the data in register

2 at a later

time,

you should save

the contents

of that register

before

issuing

the

$GETK

macro

instruction.

The

code

generated

by this macro instruction gives

control

to the data management

routine. The

data management

routine

completes

execution

and returns

control

to the

generated

code.

The

format

of the

$GETK

macro

instruction

is:

tNamell $Cerrcl eOf-aOOress

[,DTF-address]

[,ERR-addressl

EOF-address

specifies

the

address

in your program

that

receives

control

when

the

end

of file

is detected.

This

operand

must

be specified.

DTF-address

indicates

the address

of the leftmost

byte of

the DTF

for

this file. lf this

operand

is

not

specified,

the

address

is

assumed

to be

in register

2.

ERR-address

supplies

the

address

in your progr.am

where

control

is

passed

if the

controlled

cancel

option

is

taken

in

response

to a

permanent

l/O

error. lf this

operand

is

omitted,

no

code

is

generated

to check

for the

controlled

cancel

completion

code.

Construct

3741 Put lnterface ($pUTK)

The

$PUTK

macro

instruction generates

the

interface

needed

to put

a record

on the

3741. You

must

provide

a DTF for

the

file

and use

the

$DTFO

macro

instruction

to establish

the offsets in

the DTF. You

must

also

provide

an EXTRN

statement

in

your

program

with the

label

$$CpOp

to use

this

macro.

lf you

will

need

to use

the

data in register

2

at a later

time,

you

should

save

the

contents

of that

register

before

issuing

the

$PUTK

macro

instruction.

The

code

generated

by

this macro

instruction gives

control

to the data

management

routine.

The

data management

routine

completes

execution

and returns

control

to the

generated

code.

The

format

of the

$PUTK

macro

instruction

is:

lNamell $PUTK

| [D-Ir-aodress]

[,ERR-address]

DTF-address indicates

the address

of the leftmost byte of

the DTF for this file. lf this

operand

is not

specified,

the

address

is

assumed

to be in register

2.

ERB-address

supplies

the address

in your program

where

control is

passed

if the controlled cancel

option is taken in

response

to a permanent

l/O error. lf this operand

is

omitted, no code

is

generated

to check

for the controlled

cancel

completion code.

Tape Device

Support

This

section describes

the

macro

instructions

that support

the IBM 341013411

Magnetic

Tape

Subsystem.

The

follow.

ing functions

are

provided:

o Build

a

pre-open

DTF for tape and

assign tts

of

fsets.

o Build

the interfaces

required

to read

input

records

from

a tape device

via

a

get

or a

read.

o Build the interfaces

required

to write

output records

to

a tape

device via

a put

or a

write.

o Build

the interface

required

to issue

tape

control

commands.

o Wait for completion

of read,

write,

or tape

control

operations.

The

tape DTFs

provide

information

to the

tape data man-

agement routines

that perform

the input/output

operations.

These

operations

are

provided

through the tape

support

macro

instructions.

Define the File for Tape ($DTFT)

The DTF provides

information needed

to allocate

and open

a tape device.

This macro instruction

generates

the code

that builds

the tape DTF. See

Appendix B: Def ine the

File Control Blocks for a description of the pre-open

and

post-open

DTFs.

The format

of the

$DTFT macro

instruction is:

INamel

| $DTFT I NAME-filename,tO-address,BLKL-number,

RECL-number

[,UP-mask]

[.AC-tN/OUT]

[,CHN-address]

LBASIC-YiN

J

I,RCAD-addressl

t,MODE-6CATE/MOVEI

[,MBUFF-Y/N ] [.RECFM-code]

[,LlOA-number]

t,SPAN-Y/Nl

t.CODE-A/El

[,OSET-B/number]

[,END

code]

[.MVF-Y/N]

NAME-filename is

a required operand

specifying the name

of the tape file. The

filename

can be up

to eight

characters

in length

and

must

be the same as the

narne

of the

// FILE

statement.

Macro Instruction Statements 49

lO-address

specif

ies the address

of the leftmost byte of the

main

storage

area

used to contain

all

buffers

and lOBs. This

operand

is required.

The length

of the area

specified

bv

this

address

is specified

in

the LIOA operand.

Noti:: l{ basic

data managentent

routines

are used

to

process

the file,

tlris

operarrd

should

poir)t

to a 40_bvte

area

to contain

the

tape

lOB.

BLKL-number is

a required

operand

that specifies

the deci-

mal

block

length

for the

f

ile. The minimum block

length

allowed

is

18

bytes. if a

shorter

length

is

specified,

1g is

assumed.

For

f

iles

with fixed-length

records,

the

block

length

must

be

a

multiple

of the record

length;

for files

with

variable-length

records,

the

block length

must

equal

the

length

of the longest

record

plus

eight.

Note: lf basic

tape

data management

is

used.

the

block

length

in

the DTF ($DFBKL) must

be

updated

after

the file

is

opened

and

before

any read

or write

operation

is

per_

formed. The field

must

also

be updated

before

any

subse-

quent

read

or write if the

length

used

is

different

than

the

prevrous

read

or write.

RECL-number

is

a decimal

value

specifying

the

length

of a

logical

record

in

the file. lf variable-length

records

are used

for the

file,

the record

length

specified

must

be equal

to the

longest

record

plus

four. The minimum record

length

when

variable-length

records

are

used is four,

which

results

in

zero-length

records.

The minimum record

length for files

using f

ixed-length

records

is 18. This

operand

is

required.

UP-mask

specifies

the mask

to test

the eight

external

indicators. The code

for the UP-nrask

must be

specified

as

8 binary

bits. For

example,

to test bits

0,3, 5, and 7,

you would

enter

UP-10010101.

The

Up-mask

is compared

to the external

indicators

set

on by the SWITCH

statement

for

conditionally

opening

files. lf the

bits that are on in

the

UP-mask

are also

on in

the

external

indicators

set

on by

the

SWITCH

statement,

the

file

will be

opened. lf the

UP-mask

is

all zeroes

or not used,

the file

will be uncondi-

tionally

opened.

Note: lnformation orr setting

external

indicatr:rrs

{SWITCH

statement)

can

be found int-he

IBM Svstem/3

Modet lS

System Control Programming Reference Manual for pro-

gram

Number

5704-SC1

,

GC2|-5O77,

and IBM

System/3 Model l5 System Control Programming Con-

cepts

and Reference

lVlanual

for Program Number 5704-

sc2.

GC21.5162.

AC-lN/OUT specif ies

the type of file. lN specif ies

an input

file;

OUT, an output file. lf this operand

is not entered,

lN

(input)

is

assumed.

Note: The

operation

code in

the Tape DTF will be initial-

ized

according

to the entries

specified

(or

defaults)

of the

AC and BASIC

operands,

as

follows:

CHN-address

specifies

the address of the next DTF in the

chain

of DTFs. lf there is no DTF chain

or if this DTF is

the last DTF in

the

chain, this operand

should

be omitted

and X'FFFF'assumed.

AC-IN AC-OUT

BASIC-Y Read forward Write

BASIC.N Get Put

EASIC

Yt'N

specrfies

whetlrer

riris

t)'f-F

uses

the

basic

access

method. lf tlris operarrd

is rrot

entered,

N (no)

is

assumed.

lVotes'

1" BASIC Y ntusr

be specified

i{

any

of the following

macro

rnsl.rLt{:tioils

are used

to t.rrocess

fhq

f ile: $RD-f

, $Wnff ,

$CfLl or $W'tT.

2. lf you process

ASCII

f

iles

us;inq

tfre

basic

access method,

you must

tfanslate

the

characters

in

your program.

3. Multivolume

f

iles

are supported

with the

hasic

access

rnethocl,

but the EXTRN statement

that is

provided

must

be

$$BTMM for multivolume

support. $$Afnvl

and $$BTMM should

not be r-rsed

irr

tfre

same

program.

$$Sf MM supports

both

single

ancl mrrltivolr-rme

f

iles.

4" Deferred

cperr

is rrot

allowe<J

with the basic

access

method.

RCAD-address

specif ies

the syrrrbolic

rr:corcl

area

;rdr:lress.

-Ihis

operancl

is required

for all

operatiorrs

using

the

basic

access

method. lf standard

data

rnarragefirent

is userj,

this

operand

is required

for an

output operation

ancl for an

input operation

using move

mocle.

MODE-LOCATEiMOVF irrdir;ates

wlrether

the

lo661s

m66s

or move

rnode

is

used. l{ this

oprerancl

is rrot

specified,

fulOVE

is

assurned. When

locate

rnode

is

sper:ifir:cJ,

tlre

record

address

(RCAD-address)

is

set

tr.l thr:

acicirers of tlre

rr:cord

in

the

buffer. When

move

moclr:

is

Lrsed. re<;orrls

are

rrloveo

fronr the lrr-rffer

tr-r the locatiorr

sltecifiecl

bv tht recorr:

adrlr ess"

Locate

mocle

is valid

only

for iriput filr:s. llric

otraranrj

shoultl

not be used

if BASIC

Y is sr:er;if

ierJ

RE(.:FlVl-t:ttde

specif ies

the reccrcl fornr;11

rrst:tl ior tlrr_, {i1e.

Tlr,'

':odcs

and

their

nrearrirrqs

arr:

Code

F

FB

Vts

i-)

DB

Record Format

Fixecl,

EBCDIC

or

ASCIt

Fixed

blocl<ecl. F-UCt.)lC

or A,SCll

Var iable,

EBCD

lC

Variable

blockerJ,

E

B(lD l(l

Variable,

ASC I I

Variable

blocked,

ASCI

I

lf tiris

operarrd is not specified. F is

assulnecl.

MBUFF-Y/N indicates

whether

rnore

tltar r.rrr:r

irrrf

fr:r

j,r

used.

lf this

operand

is not

specified,

N (rro)

is

assurrrerl.

^fhe

number

of buffers is

deterrnirrer_l

by lltr: lorrqtlr

of tlre

l/O area,

specified

by the LIOA operancl.

.l

iris olrr:rarrrr

should

not be used

if BASIC Y is

spr:ci1ieri.

LIOA-nuntber

is

the

total

r-lecirrral

lenglh

of tlre

l/O area

if

more

than

two buffers

are requirecl

(tvlULjFF

y). lf ttre

number

specified

is zero

or if tiris

entry

is

r.rrrritrcri,

twcr

buffers

are

allocatcd

in the

l/O

area lf this

errrry

is rrr,,l

zero,

as many

buffers

as

possible

are

allocated

in the l,/O

area.

The following

formula

can

be usecl

to rJeternrirre

rire

lerrgth

of the l/O area:

Length

of the l/O area

.= (40 r block lr:ncltlr)

tirrres

(nrrmber

of brrffprsi

This

operand

should not be

used

if BASI()

Y is

slrecified.

SPAN-Y/N

specifies wlretlrer

spannecl

recorrls

arn

Lrst_.r1.

li

spanned

records

are used,

BASIC Y rrrust

also

lrr:

sPr:r;ifilrtl.

lf this

operand is

omitted, N (no)

is assr.rrrrr:r,1.

Sp,,rcifying

SPAN Y causes

the

sparrrretl rer:rird

bit irr

tlrrr tir1.;e l;rtr|l

to

be

set on. When

you use

SPAN.Y,

you n)l.rit

i|ari Ilrr:

rBC-

ords from block

to block.

CODE-A/E

specif ies

wheth+:r

tlrr:

Iilrr

rs

arr

FU{]it lO

f ilt: or

ASCII file. lf the file

is an FBCDIC file,

spr--r-:ity

CODE

l:

lf the file

is

an ASCII file

or

carr

he

r:illrer

ASOII

or EBCDIC,

s;.rtrcify

CODE-A. lf tlris

rtperarrtl

is rrot

lrrtlr:rl_ F

is

assu

rne

(l

_

OSET-B/rtuntber

specif ies

ther lrrr{ f r.:r o

i

fsr

l ,r

i 'rrr

/\SC

I I

blocl<.

B indicates

that the

first

four [lytt:s

o1 tIrr: irlor:k

corr

taitt

the decirrral

block length

and rro l.rrrIfr:r

;;1i:],,i

!r!

l)r{}ii

enl. B is

valid

only when

RECFM U

or tlE(l i lM

DU is

alscr

specif

ied.

Only OSET"B

or CXiE'T,00

;r e vaiitl f

or outf)ut

iiles"

OSt:l-rrunrLrei

s;'recifies,

iri tlnt:irnal,

tlrc

leirc;tfr

rif

tlre

buffer

offset for the

ASCII block. -l-lris

bLrf [er

of fset

is

skipped

over wlten

the

record

is sr"rltlrlrr:rl

t(r

yi)ur

l)toqrlln.

'fhe

maximurn

valid

specification is

OSF-f {ltJ lf rf ris

opr:r

and

is not

specif ied, zero

is assumed.

Macro Inslru(;trorr

Slatt,rrrents 51

END-code

specifies

the tape

control actions

to be

when

the f

ile

is

closed.

The

valid

codes

and

their

are :

The

code

generated

by this

macro

instruction

gives

control

to the

data management

routine;the

routirre

cnmpletes

execution

and returns

control

to the

generated

code" lf the

ER

R

or EOF

operarrd

rs

specif

ied,

the

generate(J

cLrcl(l tests

the completion

code returned

by data

manageme

nt jlnd

branches

to your routine. lf reading

variatrle

lcnqtlr

recortjs,

tape

data management

returns

tlre length

of the recoro

at

label

$DFCRL

in

the

DTF.

The format

of the

gGETT rnacro

instruction

is:

MODU

LE-name

f

.DTF,address

l

[,RCAD-addrcssl

[,OPC-Y/N]

[,ER

R-acldressl

[,EOF-address]

MODU

LE-name is

a

required

operand

that

specif

ies

the

module

name

of the

tape data

management

subroutine.

Following

are

the module

names

used

ar-rd tfre

types

of files

they

will process:

$$CSIT EBCD

lC f

ixed input

$$CSIA EBCD

lC

or ASCII

fixed

input

$$CSTI EBCDIC

(fixed

or variable)

lnput

$$CSAI EBCDIC

or

ASCII

(f

ixed

or

variable)

input

An EXTRN must

be

provided

for the

rnodule

nanre

that is

used.

DTF-address

indicates

the address of the leftrnost

bytr:

of

the DTF for this tile. lf this

operand is not

specifir;ri,

tlre

address

is

assurned

to be

irr

register

2.

RCAD-address

specif ies

the address

of the leftmost llyte of

the logical

record

area. lf this operand

is not entered,

the

address

of the record

area

is

assur,red

to be in

the DTF at

$DF

LRA.

OPC-Y/N

specif ies whether to generate

the cotje

tL_- set the

operation

code. lf this

operand is nc,rt

entered,

N (no)

is

assumed,

and

the

operation

code is not modified.

ERR-address

supplies the address it-r

your progranr

wherrc

control is

passed

if the corrtrolled

cancel

option is

taken irr

response

to a

permanent

l/O error. lf this operand

rs

omit-

ted,

no

code is

generated

to check

for the contrcrlied

cancel

completion

code.

taken

mean

ings

Code

REWIND

UNLOAD

LEAVE

Action

Rewind

the

tape

Rewind

and unload

the

tape

No

action

taken

lf

this

operand

is not

entered,

REWIND

is

assumed.

MVF Y/N specifies

whether

this

f

ile

has

multivorume

rape

output. lf this

operand

is not specif ied,

y (Ves)

is

assumed.

Construct a Tape Get lnterface ($GETT)

l-ire

$GETT macro

instruction

generates

the interface

required

to communicate

with tape

data

management

when

a record

is

being read

from a tape file. To use

this

instruc_

tion,

you must

construct

a

tape DTF for the file

ano

use

t

re

$DTFO macro

instruction

to establish

the

offsets

in

the

DTF.

lf you will need

to use

the data

in register

2 at a later

time,

you should

save

the

contents

of that register

before

issuing

the

$GETT macro

instructron.

You must

also

provide

the labels

for the necessary

oata

management

routines

through

EXTRN statements

in

your

program.

The

names

and functions

of the data

management

routines

are

shown

in Figure

13.

Figure 13. Tape Data Management Modules

Module

Name Type of File Being Processed

$$CSIT

$$csor

$$CSIA

$$CSOA

$$CSTI

$$CSTO

$$CSAI

$$CSAO

EBCDIC

f

ixed

input

EBCDIC

f ixed

output

EBCDIC

or

ASCII fixed

input

EBCDIC

or

ASCII f

ixed

output

EBCD

lC tixed

or variable

input

EBCDIC

f ixed

or variable

output

EBCDIC

or ASCII

fixed

or variable

input

EBCDIC

or

ASCII fixed

or variable

outpul

52

EOF-address

specif

ies

the address

in your program

that

receives

control

when

the enrJ-of_file

is

detected.

lf this

operand

is

not supplied,

no

code

is

generated

to check

for

the

end

of-file

condition.

Note: lf E

R

or EOF

addresses

are

not

specif

ieo, you

should

check

the

return

code

in

your program

to determine

the

outcome

of the

operation

Cottstrrjct a Tape

put lnterface ($pUTT)

This

macro

instruction

generates

the interface

neecled

to

communrcate

with tape

data

management

when

writing

a

record

to tape. You must

provide

a DTF for the

file

and

use

the

$DTFO macro

instruction

to establish

the

offsets

In

the

DTF. You

must

also

provide,

through

EXTRN

statements

in

your program,

the

labels

of the

tape

oata

rnanagement

modules

necessary

to perform

the

output

operation (see

Figure

13).

lf yoir

will need

to use

the

data

in register

2 at

a tater

t,me,

you should

save

the

contents

of that register

before

issuino

the

SPUTT

rnacro

instruction.

The

code generated

by this

macro

instruction

gives

control

to the

data

management

routine.

The

routine

completes

cxecution

and

returns

control

to the

generated

code. lf

the ERR

operand

is

specified,

the

generated

code

checks

the

completion

code

for errors

and

branches

to Vour

error

routine

if errors

occurred.

The

format

of the

$pUTT macro

instruction

is:

MODUI_E-name,is

a recluired

operarrd,

and

specifies

the

name

of the

tape

data

management

subroutine

to be

used.

Following

are

the

module

names

used

and

the

type of

.

files

they

will process:

LENAD-address

specifies

the address

of the rightmost byte

of a two-byte

area

which

contains

the

length

of the

current

record.

This

operand

is

used

only for

variable

files. lf this

operand

is

not

specified,

the

length

of the

record

is

assumed

to be in

the DTF at

$DFCRL.

RCAD-addre,ss

specifies

the address

of the leftmost byte of

the record

to be

put. lf this operand

is not entered,

the

record

address

is

assumed

to be in

the DTF at label

$DFLRA.

OPC-Y/N

specifies

whetner

to generate

the code

to set

the

operation

code. lf this

operand

is

not entered,

N (no)

is

assumed,

and

the

operation

code

is

not modif

ied

in

the

DTF.

ERR-address

specifies

the address

in your program

where

control

should

be

passed

if a

permanent

l/O error

occurs.

lf this

operand

is not entered,

no permanen

L l/O error

checking

code

is

generated

and

you should

check

the

return

code

in

your program

to determine

the

outcome

of

the

operation.

Bead from Tape (gRDT)

This

macro

instruction

generates

an interface

to basic

tape

data

management

to read

from a tape

device.

When

usinq

this

macro

instruction,

you must:

o Provide

a

tape

DTF and

use

$DTFO to estabt

rsh

th€r

offsets

in the DTF.

o Wait

for

completion

of the

input

operation

ancJ

;irr,;l<

for

end-of-file

by using

the

$WTT macro

insrructron.

o Provide

EXTRN statements

in

your program

for ti.;ir

basic

tape

data management

module ($$BTAF,4

rrr

$$BTMM) and for the entry point to the read

rourine

in

that module

(DMBTRW).

lf you will need

to use

the

data

in register

2

at a later

time,

you should

save

the contents

of that register

before

issuing

the $RDT macro instruction. The generated

code

for this

macro

instruction uses

register

2.

The

code generated

by

this

macro

instruction

branches

to

basic

tape

data

management

to begin

the read

operation.

$$CSOT

$$CSOA

$$CSTC)

$$CSAO

EBCDIC

fixed

output

EBCD

lC

or

ASCII

f ixed

ourput

EBCDIC

fixed

or

variable

output

EBCDIC

or

ASCII

fixed

or

variable

output

DTF-atlrJress

specif

ies

the address

of the leftmost byte of

the

DTF for the file. lf this

operand

is not

specified.

the

address

is

assumed

to be

in register

2.

Macro

lnstruction

Statements 53

{DTF

addrerssJ

[,RCAD-address]

l.tl

I Fr F_cT,FOHW/BACK

I

The

forrrrat

of the

$RDT macro

instruction

is:

DT t' adrlress slreuit;(js the address of the leftmost byte of

the Dl-F for

the

file. lf this operand is not entered, the

aclrjress

is ilssurn,rrl to be in register 2.

RCAI.)-;ttirlres.t

sl.,ortities the address of the leftmost byte of

tlre rcr:rir,l

,rrr,;i.

lt this

ul)(.riand is not

specified, the address

is

asslttrrtr,l t'.; lrt;

irt

the tJTF

at $DF

LRA.

Dlt':t:(.:'i

i 0lirV :tr

BACi<.

specif

ies the direction

of the

rear,1 arrtl ciirses

llrc operation code in the DTF to be

set

(see

A(l {)t)er.lr1(l

oI .9D7'FT\.

lf this operand

is not

errtererl,

Tlie

(,r.)etatrol

cocle is unchanged.

ItVrrte

tct Iaite i$WH'l'[)

I fris

trrai;i,r rrislr rrr;tion

qerier

ates the

irttertace

to basic tape

rlirta

rr,rra(;{.rrt*rt rrceclecJ

to

wnte rer:ords

to tape. When

yoU 'lils

rrr.i',,r rrrSliltCtiOn,

yOLt

fnUSt:

. Provirlr',r

l)l F tor

tlre

file

and

use the

$DTFO

macro

It:;tt{l(.1.t{]rl r,,

,rsta[ilislr

thc

offsets

in the DTF.

r \{.11

i,ii ftte

(.r)r}rpletion

of the l/O operation by using

., -.'.r

i l':irrr:lU

tilitilli;tiOl1.

* 'r,irlr:

t.')l

i

til'l

slatements

irr

your program

for

tfre

b.rsir:

l.ri,.. Li.tta nlanagenrent

module

($$BTAM

or

s,iitJ

l'tirM,

.ltd l'(,j

the entry

point

to the write routine

rr,

!i:

,l

rtl{)LJ{ll,-'

(DMB

I RW).

it r.'(;ir

\\;tii

:,iirr(l

iil rJse

tlre data irr register

2 at a

later time,

_r

,rtr

sir'

rlii

|

..jiriir

tlrij contents of that register

bef ore

issrrilrg

tire:ii\lVFi

I i iir.r,.rrr instrrrction,

itecause

the

generatecl

code

frlr llrat

1r)ai;i

ri

instt

LtLi Llses register

2.

The r;cicle

qererated

b5,this macro instruction

branches to

llasit; t;r1.r,,

i

j.ji

-,

nlanagetnent

to Start

the

OperatiOn.

The forrnat of the

$WRTT macro instruction is:

DTI:-adclress

is tlre address

of tfre

leftnrost

byte of the D-l'F

for the

file. lf this

t.;perand

is

not

specif

icd, tlte address

of

the

DTF is assunretl

to be

in registcr

2.

RCAD-address specif

ies the address

of the le

firrrost byte of

the

record area.

lf this operand

is

not specified,

the

addiess

is assumed

to be

in the DTF at

$DFLRA"

OPC'Y/N

specifies

whether the

write

operatrorl

t;r;de

in tlte

DTF is

to be set. lf N (no)

is

specified

or il th;s

irile,dtrd ts

not entered,

the operation

code

is not modified

irr the

DTF:'

Control Conrmand tor Tape (.gCTL-7')

l'his macro

instruction

generates

the

inlerf

ace

to basrc

tape data

management

to issue control

conllllands

to the

tape

device.

lt is

not used

to get

records

from or pttt

records out on a

tape

file. To use

this macro

illstrtlcli(lrr,

you Inust:

o Provicle

a D"l-F

ft-rr

the

file on the tape

device

and

trse

the

$D'f

FO rnacro

instruction

to establish the offsets

in

the DTF.

o Wait

for completiorr

of the operation

by issuing the

$WTT macro

instruction.

e Provitle EXTRN staternet)ts

ttr

yuur progrdm

f or the

basid

tape data

management

module

($$BTAM

or

$$BTMlvl)

and for the entry point to the corrir'ol

routinc

in

that nrodule

(DMBTPS)"

lf you will need

to use the

data

in register 2 at a

later lirne,

you

should save

the cotrtents

of that register

bef ore

issuing

the

$C'TL

T rnacr

o irtstrtrction.

The code

generated

by this

rnacro itrstruction branches

to

the

basic tape data

managernent

to initiate

the olleration.

The format of the

$CTLT macro

lnstruction

is:

r--- .-fl--r. _- --""

llNu'r,,1 I $clrr | [Lll

F.adciress]

[,OPC-code] |

l l l ,.-------*_--"-l

Fit-l I

DTF adclressl

[,RCAD-address]

[.oPC,Y/N ]

54

DTF-address

specifies

the address

of the leftmost byte of

the

DTF for the

file

on the

tape

device.

lf this

operand

is

not

specified,

the

address

of the

DTF is

assumed

to be

in

register

2.

OPC-code

specifies

the

control operation

to be

performed.

lf this

operand

is

not specified,

no

code

is

generated

to

modify the

operation

code

in

the

DTF. The

valid

codes

and

their

meanings

are:

Code Operation

The

format

of the

$WT'I.

nracro

i;rstruction

is:

I

DT

F-rrjdressl

i,ERR,addressl

l,EOF,

acidress

j I,EOT_addressl

[,WLl-lS-addrerss]

i.WLR

L atjcjressl

FSF

FSB

BSF

BSB

REW

RUN

WTM

Forward

space

file

Forward

space

block

Backspace

file

Backspace

block

Rewind

tape

Rewind

and

unload

tape

Write tape

mark

DTF-address

specifies

the address

of the leftmost byte in

the

DTF for the

file. lf this

operand

is

omitted,

the

address

of the DTF is

assumed

to be

in register

2.

ERR-address

is

the address

of the routine in your program

that

receives

control

when

a controlled

cancel

is

indicated

in

the

completion

code. lf this

operand

is

not

entered,

the

controlled

cancel

is

ignored

and

control

returns

to the

in

your program.

EOF-address

specif

ies

the address

of your routine that

receives

control

when

end-of_f

ile

occurs.

lf thts

operand

is

omitted,

the

end-of"file

condition

is

ignored

and

control

returns

to the

in

your program.

EOT-address

is

the address

of the routine in your program

that

receives

control

when

end-of"tape

is

detected.

lf this

operand

is

not specified,

the

corrdition

is

ignored

and

con_

trol returns

to the

in

your program.

WLRS-address

specifies

the address

of the routrne

that is

to get

control when a record

that is

too short is

read. This

operand

should

be

used

when

waiting

for a completion

of a

read

operation.

WL

R

L-address

specif

ies

the address

of the routine that

should get

control

when

a record

that is

too long

ls

read.

This

operand

should

be

used

when

waiting

jor the

comple_

tion

of a read

operation.

NOIC: IT

ERR,

EOF, EOT,

WLRS,

Or WLRL.

AdOTCSSCS

ArE

not

specified,

you should

check

the

return

code

in

your

program

to determine

the

outcome

of the

operation.

Wait For Tape t/O Completion ($WfT)

This

macro

instruction

is

used

with the

gRDT, $WRTT,

and

gCTLT macro

instructions.

lt generates

the

linkage

to

basic

tape

data

management

to wait

for the

completion

of

operations

that

have

been

initiated.

you must provide

the

address

of the

tape

DTF for the

file

and

use

the

gDTFO

macro

instruction

to establish

the

offsets

for that DTF.

You must

also

provide

EXTRN statements

in

your program

for the basic

tape

data management

module ($$BTAM or

$$BTMM) and for the entry point to the wait routine in

that module (DMBTWT). you may also

provide

addresses

where

control is

to be returned

in the event

of a permanent

l/O error,

end-of-file

condition, or end_of_tape

condition.

lf you will need

to use

the

data

in register

2 at

a tater

time,

you should

save

the contents

of that register

before

issuing

the

$WTT macro

instruction.

The

generated

code

from this

macro

instruction

checks

the

completion

code

in

the

DTF to determine

the

outcome

of

the

operation.

When

an

abnormal

completion

is

detected,

control is

passed

to the

(

i f y

o

u h

a v e

s

p

e

c i f

i e

d

. ;td'

:uj: :..'i3

fi :',",

:

T : r":"rJ'.,

instruction

in

your program.

,r

ernents 55

Device Independent Support

This section describes

the

macro instructions that support

device independent

files. Device

independent data manage-

ment

supports

sequential

f iles on disk. tape, and card

devices, and on printers.

The device type is determined at

execution

time

according

to data on the

file

card. The

fol-

lowing

functions

are

provided:

o Build a pre-open

DTF for device

independent data

management.

o Build

the interface

required to get

a

fixed

length record

from a

file.

o Build

the interface required to put

a

fixed

length

record

to a

file.

The

device independent

DTF provides

information

to the

device

independent data

management

routines

that perform

the input/output operation.

Define the File for Device lndependent ($DTFI)

The

$DTFI macro

instruction

provides

information

needed

to allocate,

open and

access

a device-independent

file. This

macro

instruction

generates

the code

that builds

a device-

independent DTF. See

Appendix B: Define the File Con-

trol Blocks

for a description

of the device-independent

DTFs. To use this

macro instruction,

you must use the

$DTFO macro instruction

to establish

the offsets

for the

DTF.

The

format of the

$DTFI macro instruction

is:

ltrtamel

I $DTFI I NAME-filename,

RECL-number,

lO-address

[,AC-l

N/OUT] [,BLKL-number]

[,RCAD-address]

[,BUFNO-1

/2]

[.CHN-address]

[,UP-mask]

NAME-filename specifies

the name of the f ile. The name

can be

eight characters

or less in length.

This operand

must

be

specified.

RECL-number

is a

decimal

value specifying

the

length of a

logical record

in the

f

ile. This

operand

is required.

Note: The record length

will be

changed by the device-

independent open to accommodate

the

physical

device size.

lf the record

length is

greater

than

the

physical

device

length, the record length

is changed

to the

device

length.

For output files,

this

means that

the

number of positions

by which the size

of the logical

record area

exceeds

the

device

size

will be

truncated

from the

rightmost

positions

of the logical

record. For input

f iles, this

means that

the

contents

of the positions

by which the size

of the logical

record area

exceeds

the device

size

will not be

changed.

lf

the record length

is less than

the physical

device length,

the

record length

is not changed

and,

for output files, the

physical

record will be

padded

with blanks.

lO-address

specifies

the address

of the l/O area. This area

must be

on a 256-byte boundary for each buffer. This l/O

area

must be at least

equal

in length to block

length

plus

40

bytes.

or be

286 bytes,

whichever

is

greater. This operand

is

required.

AC-tN/OUT specifies

the

type of file. lN specif

ies an

input

file;

OUT,

an

output file.

lf this

operand

is omitted,

lN (input)

is assumed.

BLKL-number specifies

the decimal

block length

for the

file. lf this

operand

is

not specified,

the

value of the

record

length

(RECL)

is assumed.

Note: For tape

files, the actual

block length

is

used. For

disk

files. the block

length

is rounded

down to a multiple

of

256. The

block

length

is

not used

for unit record

devices.

RCAD-address

specifies

the address

of the leftmost byte of

the

logical

record. lf this operand

is not entered,

X'FFFF'

is

assumed

and

the address

must

be supplied

when an opera-

tion is

requested.

EUFNO-I 2 specifies

the

number

of buffers

to be

used. lf

this

operand

is not specified,

1 is assumed.

CHN-address

specifies

the address

of the next DTF in the

chain

of DTFs. lf there

is

no DTF chain or if this DTF is

the

last

DTF in

the chain,

this operand

should be

omitted

and

the

end of chain

(X'FFFF')

assumed.

56

i-.lP-ntask

specif

tes

tire mask

to test the eiqht

external

,riiicatorr. l-he

cocjl for tl.rc

L,rp-masi<

must be

specifiecl

.:,8

binar'/

bits. For

example.

to test

b;ts

0,3, 5, and 7,

y.rrr

v1/outd

enter

UP-''|

00j0101. The Up-mask is

com_

lrare:r.i

to the

externa!

indicators

-set

on lly the

SWITCH

riilirrmeni

tr-rr

conditiorrally

opr:rring

files. lf tl.ie

bits

that

a!'c

()r-i

l!'!

the LJP'rnask

arc

also

on in

rhe

externai

indicators

!cr.jfr I'v the

SWITCH

staterneril,

the

file,,vili

be

oirenecl.

ti the

LiP-nrask

is

all zeroes

or riot

used,

the fi!e

will be

.

J!

lui,ilrii

I :,.lnal

ly opett-:tl.

Note lnltymation

on

setting

uxrernal

rrldicatr:rs (SWITCH

staierilrrnr)

can

be foLrnd

in the ltlM System/3

Model lS

Si,srerri Coritrcl Praerantnting Referenr:e Manual (Ior

Pro,j:rm

i\ii:iirire:-

5704-SC1i,

(jC21 b077.

and

in

the

!iliv4 Sotsternt3 f,4odel 15 Sy:;tetn Cantrol programming

Cr.t

nc e7 t

rc a n rJ fl r:f

i:.ett

ce M

a,n r.

ta

I

Corsstruct

a Device-lndependent Get lnterface t$GETt)

i-l;e

$GETI macro

instruclron

generates

the intertace

need

e{i

to commuricate

with rlevice_irrdepenclent

data

manage_

irenl ,./vileri

a record

is

berng

reaci.

-To

use

this

rnacro

insti

uctiori, y()'-J

must

construct

a device-independent

DTF ir.rr

tire fiie

irrrd use

the

$D'IFC)

macro

instructron

to

estaili,::f

i rnc

ojfsets

in

the llT F. lrr

adclition,

you must

provrde

thu

iabels

fttr

the

nu{lessary

data managernent

routrnes

rnfc)ugh

an

[:Xl-RN to $$CSll in your programs.

lf yr:r,i

rr,,li

i!e.+(j

to use

the

rjat_a

in rr:gister

2 at

a

later

time,

Vor-i

shoi:id

save

[he

content$

of that

register

before

rssuirrg

the

$G

E-J'l

instructtr-;n.

The

flrnrar:f the

$GETI macrt_r

instruction

is:

Df ! auriress iriiircati;s

the

address

of the leflmost

byte

oi

ihc flTF iur i.itis

iiic. lf this

operantl

is rrot

specifiecl,

the

acjdress

ir usbumed

to be in

rt:gister

2.

h'CAD,aci,Jre.rs:'lrec;i:cs

the adclress

of the leftmost byte

ui ftrer.ecord

al;a. ii this

oprerand

is not eirterecl,

the

address

rs

assirmer_{

ti.r lte

rn

tire

D

T

F ar

$DF

L RA.

EllR address

sr.tprg.rlig5

f.iic

a{J(lr:jss

in your progran}

wnere

control

is

passetl

il iire

contrrrlicd

cancei

option is

taken

in

resporise

io a

pernl.rrrent

l/O error. lf this

operantJ

is

omit.

ted,

no

cocle

is

qirner

ated

to check

for

the

controlled

cancel

cornpletion

codc.

Pase

of

GC21_7608_2

lssued

29

September

197g

By TN

L: c

N21-5649

EAF-address

specif

ies

the address

in your program

that

receives

control

when

the

end-of-file

is

detected.

lf this

operand

is

not supplied,

no

code

is

generated

to check

for

the

end-of-file

condition.

Note: lt ERR or EOF

adclresses

are

not

specified,

Vou

should

check

the

return

code in

your program

to deter-

rnine

the

outcome

of the

operatron.

Construct a Device-lndependent put lnterface ($pUTt)

I he

$Pl-.t'l-l macro instructron

generates

the interface

need_

ed

to commur-ricate

with device_independent

data

manage-

ment

when

writing

a record.

To use

this

macro

instruction,

you must

construct

a device-independent

DTF for the

f

ile

and

use

the

$DTFO macro

instruction

to establish

the

oifsets

in

the If

TF. In

addition, you must

provade

the

labels

f

or the

necessary

data

management

routines

throuoh

an EXTRN

ro

$$CSIO

in

your

programs.

lf you will need

to use

the

data

in

register

2 at

a

later

time.

you

should save

the contents

of that register

before

issuing

the

gpurl instruction.

Jhe format

of the

gPUTI

macro

instruction

is:

INanrel

| $PUTI i IDTF

addressl

l,RCAD.addressl

[.ERR-address ] {,EOX.addressl

DTF addressincl;cates

the address

of the lef

tmost byte of

the DTF for this file. lf this

operand

is not specified,

the

address is

assumed

to be in reqister

2.

RCAD-adclress

specif ies

the address

of the leftmost bvte of

the record

area. lf this

operand

is not enterecl.

the

address

is

assumed

to be in

the DTF

at

$DFLRA.

ERR-address

supplies

the address in your program

where

control

is

passed

if the controlled

cancel

option is taken in

response

to a permanent

l/O error. lf this

operand is

omit,

ted,

no

code is

generated

to check

for the controlled

cancel

completion

code

and

you should

check

the return

code in

your program

to determine

the outcome

of the operation.

EOX-address

specif

ies the address

of the routine tnat

receives

control

when

the

end of extent

on disk is reached.

The file

will not contain

the

record

for which

the

put was

requested.

lf this

operand

is

not specified,

the code

that

checks for

the end

of extent

completion

code is not generated.

Macro

Instruclion

Statements 57

Device-

I

ndependent

Support

Page

of GC21-76O8-2

lssued 29 September 1978

BY

TN

L. GN2I-5649

CRT/Keyboard

This section describes

the

rnacro

instructions

that

support

the

CRT/Keyboard. This

support

carr be

grouped

irr

two

categories:

display

sur.lport and

prograrn

functicn key

sup

port. lt provides

the

following

capabilities:

Builds

a

pre-open

D]-F for the CRTi Keyboard

data

manilgernerlt.

BuilrJs

tne

intertace

to get

a record

{rom tne

CRTi

Keyboard.

Builds

the

interface

to put

a record

to the

CRT.

Builds

the interface

to first

put

a record

to the

CRT,

and

then

to get

a record f rorn

the KeVboard.

o Builds

the interface

to use

the

prograrn

functron

keys.

The

CRT/Keyboard

provides

information

to the

CRTI

Keyboard

data management

routines

that J:erform

the

input/output

operations.

Display

Support

The macrcs

which follow support

the display functions

of

the CRT/Keyboard.

Define the File for CRT ($DTFS)

The

$DTFS

macro instruction

provides

information

need-

ed to allocate,

open, and

access

a

CRT file. This

macro

instruction

genetates

the code

that builds

a CRT DTF.

When

using

this

macro,

$DTFO CRT-Y or 4LL-Y must

also be used. See Appendix B: Define the File Control

Rlocks

for a description

of the

CRT DTFs.

The

formar

of the

$DTFS

macro instruction

is:

IName]

| $DTFS I lPUTDAT,addressl

I.PUTLOC-numberl

[,UP-mask

I i.CHN'address]

[,PLJ-ILEhl-nurrrber

I i,OPC.code ]

I,GETDAT addressj

[,GETLOC nurnberl

[,GETLEN-number] i,BLANK,Y/N l

PUT'DAT-address

specifies

the leftmost byte of the logical

record for a

put request. For

a

$PGS

request,

this area is

used f

or the

output. lf this operand

rs rrot

specif ied,

X'0000' is

assumed,

and

the

addr-ess rnust

be

updatecl

with

(or

prior

to) the

f irst

$PGS

or $PUTS

request

issued.

PUTLOC-number

specif ies

a

number

which represents

the

starting location

on

the CRT for a

put request.

Valid

entries for

this operand

are

from 0 through 278. lf this

operand rs not specif

ied,

0 (the

f irst

CRT position)

is

assumed.

lf the number

exceeds

278.

no

data is written.

UP-mask

specif

ies

tl're maSk to test

the eight

external

indicators. The

code

for the UP-mask must be specif ied

as 8 binary

bits.

For

example,

to test bits

0,3,5, and 7,

you

would enter

UP-10010101.

The

UP-mask

is

compared

to the external

indicators

set on bV the SWITCH statement

for conditionally

opening f

iles. lf the bits that

are on in

the

UP-mask

are also on in

the external indicators

set on by the

SWITCH statement,

the file

will be

opened. lf the UP-mask

is all

zeroes

or not used.

the file will be unconditionally

opened.

fuote.' Information

on setting

external

indicators

(SWITCH

statement) can be found in the IBM system/3 Model |

5

Systen Control Programming Reference Manual (for

Program

Number

5704

SCll, GC21

5077,

and in the

IBM System/3 Model l5 System Control Programrning

Concepts and Reference Manual (for Program Number

5704 SC2) GC21.5162.

CHN-name

specif ies

the address of the rrext DTF in the

forward DTF chain, lf there is no DTF

chain or if this DTF

is the last

one

in

the chain,

this operand should be

omitted

and

end of chain

(X'FF

FF')

assumed.

PIJTLEN-number

specif

ies

the number of bytes to process

for a

put request. lf this operand is not specified,

the miss-

ing information must

be supplied with (or

prior

to) the first

$PGS or SPUTS

request.

Vaiid

entries

for this

operand are

from 1 through

279. ll

this number

plus

the entry for the

PUTLOC

operand

exceeds 279,the data written is

truncated at

location

278.

OPC-code specif ies the operation code to be set. lf this

operand is not specified,

the

information must

be supplied

with (or

prior

to rssuing)

the

first

$GETS, $PUTS,

or $PGS

request. The codes

and

their meanings

are:

Code

IN

INR

OUT

OUTIN

Meaning

Sct

operation code for input

only ($GETS).

Set operation code

for input

on request

($G

ETS).

Set

operation code

for output only

($PUTS).

Set operation code for output/input

(for

$PGS).

GETDAT-address

specifies

the leftmost byte of the area

into

which

the input

data

will be

placed

for a

get

request;

for a $PGS

request,

this

area

is

used

for the

input. lf this

operand

is

not specifiecl,

X.0000, is

assumed,

and

the infor

mation

must

be

suppliecJ

with (or

prior

to issuing)

the

first

$GETS

or $pGS

requesr.

GETLOC-number

specifies

a number which indicates

the

starting

location

on the

CRT for a

get

request.

Valid

entries

for this

operand

are

0 through

27g. lI this

operand

is

not

specified,

0 (the

first

CRT position)

is

assumed.

lf

a number

greater

than 27g is

specified,

no data

will be

read.

GETLEN-number is

a decimal

number which represents

tne

number

of bytes

to get. lf this

operand

is

not specified,

X'0000' is

assumed,

and

the

missing

information

must

be

supplied

with (or

prior

to issuing)

the first

$pGS

or $pUTS

request.

Valid

entries

for this

operand

are

1

through

279.

lf this

number plus

the

entry

specified

for the

GETLOC

operand

exceeds

279, the

data read

is

truncated

after

location

278.

ELANK-Y/A determines

whether to leave

the previous

data

in

the

CRT buffer

or to blank

the

buffer. lf y (yes)

ls

specified,

the

operation

code

is

set

to blank

the

butfer. lf

this

operand

is

not specified,

N (no)

is

assumed.

When

used

in

con.iunction

with the

$PUTS and

$pGS macros,

the

operand

causes

all

279

bytes

to be

blanked;

when

used

with $GETS.

only the

input

area

is

blanked.

Get a Record from the CRT/Keyboarcl ($GETSI

The $GETS macro instruction

generates

the interface

need-

ed

to communicate

with CRT

data

management

when

a

record

is

being

read

from the

CRT. To use

this

macro

in-

struction,

construct

a CRT DTF for

the

file

and

use

the

$DTFO macro

to establish

the

offsets

for the

DTF. you

must

include

an EX'f

RN

for $$CODM. lf you will need

to use

the

data

in register

2 atalater

time,

you should

save

the contents

of that register

before

using

the $GETS

macro

instruction.

The

format

for the

$GETS macro

instruction

is:

tNamel | $GETS I IDTF.address]

[.GETDAT_address]

[,G

ETLEN-number]

[,GETLOC-number]

[,BLANK-Y/N] t,OPC-I

N/I

NR/N]

[,EO

F

-addressl

DTF-address specif

ies

the leftmost byte of the DTF for

this

file. lf this

operand

is

not

specified,

the

acldress

of the

DTF is

assumed

to be in register

2.

GETDAT-address

specifies

the leftmost byte of the area

into

which

the

data

will be

placed.

GETLEN-number specifies

the number of bytes

to get.

Valid entries

for this operand

are 1 through 27g. lf the

sum

of this

number plus

the number

specified

for the

GETLOC operand

exceeds

279, the

data read

is

truncated

after location 279.

GETLOC-number specifies

a number representing

the start_

ing

location

on the

CRT for this

get. Valid

entries

for this

operand

are

0 {the

first

CRT position)

through

27g. lf this

entry exceeds

278, no data is read. lf this operand

is

omit_

ted,

the corresponding

entry in the DTF is not modified.

ELANK-Y/N determines

whether to leave

the previous

data

in

the

CRT buffer

or to blank

the buffer. lf y (ves)

is

specified,

the

operation

code

is

set

to blank

the buffer. lf

this

operand

is

not

specified,

N (no)

is

assumed-

OPC-lNlNR /y'y'

determines

whether

to set

the operalon

code

to input

only

(lN),

to input

on

request

(lNR),

or

to

leave

the

operation

code

unchanged.

lf INR is

entered.

the

operator

is

prompted

WAITING FOR REOUEST. Then,

when

the PA1

key is

pressed,

ENTER DATA is

prompted.

lf N (no)

is

specified

or if this

operand

is

omitted.

the

operation

code is

not changed.

EOF-address

specifies

the address

in your program

that

should

receive

control when end of file is

recognized

(end

of file is indicated

by /* as the first two characters

of input)

lf this operand

is

not specified,

no code is

generated

to

check

for the

end-of-f

ile condition,

and

you should

check

the return

code in your program

to determine

the ourcome

of the operation.

Generate a PIJT/GET Operation Through CRT Data

Management ($PGS)

This

macro instruction generates

a pUT/GET data request

to CRT data

management.

To use

this instruction,

you

must

construct

a

CRT DTF for the file

and use

the

$DTFO

macro instruction to establish

the offsets

in the DTF.

Macro

Instruction

Statements Sg

h;:J;;;.,-T

tll

iil

itl

.t_ -_-- __f-

Yi,{! itiu!i itls{ ilr'}vir

trl ilte l.;irels for-

the neccssary

data

mi.r!)td]crnellt

'lrrlint:s tlrrorrqh

an EXTRN for $$CODM.

It yor, ;,rill

;rrr(.r

j iu !tsc

tiio tlat.r irt registef

2 at a laler time

yorr shr,,.,l<1

save thc curtient.r

cf that register

before issuing

,he

$PGS

;ndcro irrstr'rrctrur,.

il;1;

ilri,tirf {L,r

tlre

$PCll rnacro

instruction

is:

D.l

F adcln's;

slrecif

ies

tho

address of the DTF for this file.

!f tirt: r'rfrurarrd is r0t slir:cified,

the adclress is assurned

to

lr'rrlllO{jii-el

7.

t; i ANk 'f'.fu

rillt{itrniiti;s rnrhether

to blank the data in tlte

'..1./1it',ri,:;rrprr'.

itrr:a bi'fort; .i

CllT operation. lf Y (yes)

is

.rici:itr''rl,

rlr.r,.rrrcralir:rrcoclc is

sot to blank the input

area;

.r

rlr,:

|trrr.rrrr.i rs

Ornittr:d, N (|o) is

assunred

and the area

i: fti)l

l)iilrll(ird.

!.)l'l:

y',t:\i

r;1.'ccrii':s

lvhether

to set the operation code

to

'ull)r.tl/'irtjril

lf frl

is specif ieti

or

if

this operand is not

s1;lr:illt:'1.

\ irrr-rJ

ir dssutfled,

iltrd the operation code is not

trodif

icti ur

the DTI-.

PLJ T t)A T-address

identif ies

the lef

tmost byte of the user

area

1rc)n)whiclrthe

rlata

will

be taken.

PUT

!, EAI-number

specif

ies

the number of bytes to put to

ti,,r CRT. Valid entries

for

this operand are 1 through 279.

lf lire

sunr ol tiris

number

plrrs

the entry

specified

for the

Pt

JTL..OC

olrerand exceeds

279, the data written is truncated

aft.rr

location

278.

PUTLOC-nurriber

specif ies the starting location

on

the

screen ior

this

put

request. Valid

entries

for

this operand

ar.e

0 (the

first

CRT

position)

through 278. lt this number

,

xcciiJs

2/8, no dala is written.

GETDAT-number specifies the leftrnost

byte of the area

into

which the data will be

placed.

GEf LEN-nurnber

specifies

tho numbe.

of bytes

to get

fronr

the

CRT. Valid entries

for

tlris

operand are 1 through 279.

lf the surn of this

number

plLrs

the entry specitied

I'or the

GETLOC

operarrcl

exceerls 2/9, the clata reaci

is

truncated

after

location 278.

GETLOC-nurnber specif

ies the starting

location

on the

CRT

for

this

get

re(luest. Valid errtr ies

for this operand

are

0

(the

first CRT positicln)

through

278. lf tfris number

excceds 278, no data is read.

EOF-address specrtres the address in your progranr

that

should receivc c()ntrol \'vhen end of file is recogrrized

(indicated

by the

characters

/* iri tire

tirst

tlnro irrput

posi.

tions). lf this operand

is

not specif

ied, no code

is

generated

to check for the er.rd-rif-file

condition,

arrd

you should

check

the

return

code

in

your pfogram

tor the outcome ot

the operation.

Note: lI the followinq operands

- PUT DAT, PUTLOC,

PUTLEN, GE-TDAT,

GETLOC.

GETLEN,

BLANK,

oT OPC

'- are not specitied,

you must

supply the missing

informa-

tion in tl.re

DTF:

before

issuing tlre

first

$PGS

request.

Put a Record to the CRT via Data Managentent ($PUTS)

This maclo instruction

generates

a

put

data request to CRT

data

tnanagement. To use this macro

instruction,

you must

construct a CRI'DTF for the file and

use

the

$DTFO

macrr.'

instr uction

to establish

the offsets

in the DTF.

lf you will need to use

tlle

data in

regrster

2 at a

later tirne,

you should

save the contents of tfrat

register

before

issuing

the

$PUTS

macro irrstruction.

You must

also

provide

the

labels for the necessary clata

management

routines

through

an

EXTRN

to $$CODM.

The fornrat

for the SPUTS

macro instruction is:

IDTF'addressi

t,BLANK

Y/Nl t,OPC

Y/!L]

[,PUTDAT-acldress] [,PUTLOC-nuntbt:r

j

[,PUTLEN-number

i

DTF'address specif

ies the address

<lt

the DTF for this f ile.

lf this operand is not specified,

the address

is assumed

to be

in

register 2.

IDI I ac]rlr,:ssl

i.BLANK-YiNj I.OPC-Y/Nl

l.PU

f DAI arjriressl

[,PUTLEN-nLrrrrtrer]

l,PlJ

IL.OC nLrrrberl [,GEfDAT,a<ftiress]

i,GL:i-l i:N'rrurnber

I [.GET

[-OC'nunrber]

i.IO[:;rdriressJ

BLANK-Y/N specifies

whether

to blank the data in the

2

Z9-byte

input

area

before

a CRT operation. lf y (ves)

is

specified.

the

operation code

is

set to blank

the input

area.

lf this operand

is omitted

or if N (no)

is

specified,

the input

area is not blanked.

OPC-Y/N

specif ies

whether the operation

code

rs

set

to out-

put only. lf this operand

is

omitted,

or if N (no)

is

specified.

the

operation

code is not modified.

PrlJTDAT-address

specifies

the leftmost byte of the area

from which

the data will be taken.

PIiJTLOC-number

specifies

the starting

location on the CRT

for this

put. Valid

entries for this

operand

are

0 (the

first

CRT

position)through

278. lf this rrumber

exceeds

278.

no

data

is written.

PIJTLEN-number specif ies how many bytes to put to the

CRT. Valid

entries for

this operand

are

i through

279. lf

the

sum of this

number

plus

the entry

specified

for the

PTJTLOC

operand exceeds

279,the rlata

written is

truncated

at location

278.

N'ote: lf the

following

operands

- PUTDAT, PUTLOC,

PIJTLEN,

BLANK,

or OPC

- are missing,

the missrng

in-

fc,rmation

must

be supplied irr

the DTF before the first

put

request

is issued.

Program

Function Key Support

Program Function

(PF)

keys

1-9

on the

CRT/Kevboard

are

al'ailable for use in

your program.

When

an assigned

PF key

is

pressed,

the

program

requesting

its use is

notified. The

program

may

then test to see which

keV was

pressed

in

order

to condition

subsequent

operations.

Generate a Parameter List for a Program Function Key

Request ($COEP)

This macro

instruction

generates

a

ten-byte

parameter

list

which requests

a

program

funr:tion

key. The format

of the

generated

list is

as

follows:

KEY-number specif ies

the number of the p:ri.rqr.rm

{unction

key requested

(keys

1-9

are available lor assignrnenf to your

program). lf this operanrJ is

not specified, PFg

is

assigned.

Allocate Program Function Key tct a Prograrn ($PFKy'l

The

$PF

KY macro

shoulci be used initially

ro aliocate a

function

key to a

program

for subsequent testinG via

the

$PFKT'

macro. lf the function

key has

aiready i;i:err

allocated.

the ERR branch will be affecteri.

The forrnat

of the

$PFKY macro instructiori

is

CoE-address

specifies the address of the pararneter

list

that

specifies which program

function key

to assign, and

loads

this

adciress into registei 1. lf this

operand is not specified,

the address is

assumerJ to be in register

1 (see

$COFPi if

you wiil need

the contents of register

1

at a

later

time,

/ou

should save

the contents

of that register beJcre rssrrirrq

the

SPFKY

macro

instruction.

E R R-address

specif ies the address

In yc)r.n progtam that

shouid

receive

control if the completion

corie ilt the

param-

eter list irrdicates

that the requested

key is

rroi

available

lf this operand is

not specrfied, no codr:

iB

genelated

to

ctieck for a successful

key

assigrrment, and

you shoulri

check

the completion

code in

your []ararneier

list

to cleter-

rnine the

outcome

of the operation ia

vaiue

oi X'40'at

displacement

2 in

the

parameter

lrsf indicaies

that

a

key

was

successfully

assigned).

lviat:ro Ilistr iir: i J', illaiary;:lis

Cfl T

/KrVboarrj Sirtli),j:

t

Byte

06

7

8

I

Field Description

Reserved

COE O-code

COE request code

PF

key requested

The format

of the

$CQEP

rnacro

instruction rs:

It.E

Y

-n

umber

I

61

Page

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued

29 September

1978

8y TNL: cN21-5649

Test for Program Function Key pressed

($pFKT)

Your program

can

either

wait for a

program

f

unctron

Key

to be

pressed.

or it can

test

at any time to see if a specified

key

was

pressed.

Only

one

program

function

key

can bc

pressed

before

your proEram

is

notified.

This

macro

instruction

generates

code

to test

whetner

a

program

function key was

pressed.

The chart under

tJsing

More Than One Program Function Key shows tlie value to

check

for to determine

if a specific

key was

pressecl.

The

format of the

$PFKT macro

instruction

is:

lNamell

$PFKT

I lCOb.addrcssi

l,WAtr-y,Nl

[,

LA

B

E

L-add ress

]

CQE-address

specif ies

the address

of the parameter

list

tlrat

was

used

to request

the assignment

of the

program

function

key being

tested,

and loads

this address

into register

1 (the

address

is

assumed

to ber in register

1 if tlris

operancJ is not

specified).

lf you will need

the

contenl.s of register

1 at a

later

time,

you should

save the

content:;

of that rerlistttr

before issuing

the

$PFKT macro

instruction.

WAIT-Y/N specifies

whether

to wait for the

assrgned

pro-

gram

function

key

to be

pressed.

lf Y (yes)

is

specified,

your program

waits

until

an assigned key is

pressed.

lf rro

keys

have

been

assigned,

this is

a

permanent

wait. lf N

(no)

is

specified,

or

if

this

operand is

cmitted,

tlre

LABEL

operand

must

be specified.

LABEL-address

specifies

the address irr

your prograrn

that

should receivt-r

cnntrol

when

an

assigned

proqram

function

key

is

pressed.

Tfris

operand

is used

only if WAIT-N

is

specif

ied

or

if

the WAIT

,rperanC

is

omitted.

Using More 'fhan Orte Proqram Furtction Key

lf you warrt

to use more

ilhan

orre

proqram

functron

key in

vour prcqram,

you ff11:it request

each key

separatr:ly,

using

tile

$PF

K. Y'

rnacio

iilslructron. Y(ru

rrust r-ise

a ciifferent

paranretoi

list ior r:acfi

clifferent

keV

yod rvish

to assiqri.

'To

test

if a

program

tunctio't key

was

pressed,

you should

ilsue

the $PFKT nracro

instruction. Then,

when control

is

returrred

tLr

your Dr.ograrrn,

Torr

shilulci

cietermine

which

key

was

plessed.

The

iollowrng

chart

shovus

which

f ielcls

In

the

parameter

list

should

be

modified

ancl investigated:

Value to set a disp{acement Value to test for at dis-

09 before issuing gPFKY placement 02 after issuing

PF Key macro instruction $pFKy macro instructiorl

1 X',00

2 X',Ob',

3 X',Ol\'

4 X,OF'

5 X',14',

6 X',lai'

7 x'lE'

I x'23',

I X',28',

x'31'

x'32'

x'34'

Y',?1.'

x'36',

x'37',

X'38'

x'39',

62

OCL FOR

MACRO PROCESSOR

OCL

statements used

to call

the

macro

processor

can be

entered

through the

system input device

or be called

as a

procedure

from

the

source

library.

The

OCL statements

necessary

to call the macro

processor

are

shown in Figure

14.

The

/i COMPILE

statement

shown is only necessary

when input

is

in a source library.

SAMPLE PROGRAM

This

sample

program

uses the macro

processor

and the

IBM

System/3 Model

15 Basic Assembler

Program:

5704-

AS1

or

5704-AS2.

The

coding

shown in Figure

15

pro-

duces

an object

program.

To use

the

program,

you

must

link

edit the object

program

and execute

it. The macro

processor

can

be

used with

any

valid

assembler

on the IBM

Svstem/3 Model

15 and

is

not

limited

to use

with the

program

product

5704-AS1

or 5704-AS2.

Purpose

of the Sample

Program

The

sample

program

in Figure

15 is used

to print input

records

entered from the system input device. lt reads

data records

from the system

input device

and prints

them

on a line

printer. Each

printed

line reproduces

one

input

record. lf the

spooling

f

unction is

active for this

program,

the input may

have been read

prior

to running

this

program.

and the output may be

retrieved

at any

time convenient

for you.

Chapter

3: OCL and

Sample

Program

Termination

of the

Sample

Program

The sample

program

terminates

in one

of two

ways:

1. After successful

completion

of the

program,

EJ

is

displayed

on the

CRT.

2. When an

error

occurs during

processing.

one of the

following halts

is displayed on the CRT.

A1-if an error is returned

from

the

system input

routi ne.

A2-if an error

is returned

from

the

printer

routine.

You respond

to these

halts by choosing option 2.

EJ is

then displayed

on the CRT.

Anv 5444 disk drive may be used.

Any valid

ll FILE statement

may be

used.

Source

statements

with macro

instructions.

Figure 14. OCL Statements for Using the Macro Processor

OCL and Sample

Program 63

42 43 446 46 47 4 agS 51 52 53 * 55

15 16 r7 fa 19 n 21 22 23 24 6 6 27 2a A I 31 32 $ s tr S 3r S S { 11 a2 1a 11

$ 46.1 5152$s55S57$S 52 63 fl 656 67 s 59 70 71 72 73 7a 7516

Figure

15 (Part

1 of 41. Sample

Program

Figure

15 lPart2 ot 4). Sample

Program

51 52 53 s 55$ 57 $ 5sm6t 62 A il 65S 6r S 6970r1

14 rs16 rr rg 19 n2i 22 23 24 E N 2i n a I 3t 32 $ g4\ a2.a uS 6 47

G €S51 52fi g 55$ 57 $ sS61 52 s il 656 67 s @7071 12 i3 1a7516

64

Figure

15

(Part

3 of 4).

4? 43 4445 46 47 48 499 51 5253 s 55$ 57 58

s96061 62 6364 656 67

@ 697071 7

s 37 S 3S4 41 424a A6 46

47 48 49$ st 5253 s 55$ 57 $ Sm61 52 S e 656 67 S 697071 72 13 14

$ 57 s 59 m6r 62 63 e 656 67 @ 697011 12 i3 )4

Figure 15 (Part 4 of 4). Sample Program

OCL and Sample

Program

Macro

Instructions

Used

in the

Sample

program

Fifteen

macro

instructions

are

used

in

this

sample

program.

The

macro

instructions

and

their functions

are:

Macro

Instruction

$ALOC

$OPEN

$CLOS

$DTFD

$EOJ

$READ

$PUTP

$DTFP

$DTFO

$RLSD

$RLST

$LOGD

$LOG

$LMSG

$PUTD

Function

Allocates

the

printer

file

to this

program.

Opens

the

file

after

allocation.

Closes the output file.

Constructs

the DTF for disk.

Calls the end-of-job

routine.

Reads input records

from the system

reader.

Prints

output records

on the

printer.

Constructs

the DTF for the

printer.

Establishes

the offsets

for the

printer

and disk DTFs.

Generates

offsets

for the system reader

parameter

list.

Constructs

the parameter

list for the system

reader.

Generates offsets for the system log parameter

list.

Logs

message

on the system log device.

Constructs the parameter

list for the system log.

Puts

records

to a

disk

f ile.

, lil.!l

1.1

jli;1r'r'

i.,,.tr-"'f*_

(-,..,ile I

Appelrdix

A: Error lnfonltatiorr

lir ror Descriptitirr

,\ l<e.,:n,orrl re:jl)ilnso ltas tesltlle(l irr

arr trrr,:rlrl

rler:rrr.rl

rirrtit or a llotrntlarv exct:t:dt:rl corrcliiion

iS,:fr

rrirtt.)

r\f r.,,r! it L.!i|[iilrli]lr()il

.rItStt

rrt

tltts

tnaCltl ,ll

'.trrrr:lr!rr.

Nlrtlrlarrf ,:lrer.rclt't:;

ttr)r()

i()irl(l r,r

,

olrrrrtrrs I 1:l

t'i 1ir, c,lntrtut)(l Itttt:.

All tt:ntaitt

| ',,

llltrrr,

i'1 lilr\ nracro urslru(:lt()t) will irt: llailuerl

r',,tlr'

llir'

.jtl(,,

Ut,(lt,'O(l'

/\ i.r'yl'vL,,il

resl)r)rrs6r tr5L'lt{)(l I I d (,ttitdcler stritt(J

,l.rl rr;r',,,:,ls

rh,:

rnaxiirrrrilt ierr,Jtlr.

(Scu

rr{)fr)

/rrr

{r il rt coill|[rtrllon extsls tr) the ltrerriirus

rLitr.rr,

isrrir..t

i)|. (ioi,rllrlt

72 rslrlarl.. i\ll

icrririnirlJ lrrrt::

oi tltrs

tnacro instrttctir;tt urtll ire

llJllil,;ri 4ri!, llrt'crr rr corle'OO'or 'l.if;'.

.:\.lr:i,rtrrt,,

r\ nlsslrU rtr irtrralrrl rrr llte olreratrl

oI Iilr: l)lu,"'rot;s

iliar,to Insttilctror)-

A l.rvrt!)r(i

ir ilre ntitcr(., itrstilrcltrrti

bt-'trrrl

tir.;,

i\seti ti, ll(lt \/,llld.

/ri, rrr','.rlirl

f,irrrlrrirtBr

ir,rs

lteen

iotrtttl iti oile uf

tr(i\,,1 :rrli

l,tr,\,t,,rl\

LtdL:r(r iir5ltlt(

lr('rr

I

i,a li:icri) iritlIeijli()D betng trrtr;c,-'ssr:d

c()rlIoll1s

.,,ir r,rt,l(i:rii

r)l){;t(lliO[ 1;()(jr] ij,)i Ci)rltilii]i:r,

lr1

tllil

:,r,,tr,l lriJriir/ o{ rlre

[)r01|ilrr pack.

I

irr:

rrrrrcrir,rrrr,

(ilrt:rilLi(Jr'

c(trit ot lile lri:vl()l'!

r:.,r'rr) !rr)i!

ri:,..r1 rs

irlvalid iSee

codes '(,'E'

artrl

ii iitr r,

ltossrl'lr {;il!rril laJr llliS errill {:O(1(j

)

', 1..,,',/,1

i)re ,....1)Oltie

t,,li r.,.5liltpr.l

in lir il,,itliri

.,rilrrl;trirl

r1'q

rr i$sil rirllrl)

1\

i\riyL/

!/r.i ivsl\rirlst) ir:r! iirsulte(l

rr!

a

sllUstr

i,i1l

i,,rllilji L'lrL,i 1Se,:

rrOt:)

!

1ir.

,,.il

lJlll{. ,.\-'rrrl,,:r!

lal)lc is ltrll Rti.,rde .,l,rtr

I,.,(jr,riri 1l:,ri,r

{dtr,/i,rl

rii;i(,r()

rllslr ii. rra'iiri

,llr r,i

lir,

l

:

t

!r, (.f

rrjr l,

rild\, ilr: litrt :C:ull (,f ,jry rltaCt

r) lirslr

lifttr)ri

,,,. I r'r,;, r' Ir5llrlr]1lI)rr!

tl:at ilreclliltl

i,,e aiil)l

't. ir!...:,rIn\1iir{:fiorr

Hr ror Codes

Error lnf ormation 67

Appendix

B: Define

the

File

Control

Blocks

The

DTF provides

information

to the

data

managemenr

routines

about files

you use.

you must

provicle

one

DTF

for each

file

you use in

a

program.

Certain

fields

serve

the

same

purpose

in

all

pre-open

DTFs. (pre_open

DTFs

are

reformatted

to post-open

when they are

opened

by using

the

allocate

and

open

macro

instructions.)

The

figures

in

this

appendix

describe

both the

pre-open

and

post-open

DTFs

for unit record

and

disk

devices.

Figure

tt

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

DTF

Described

MFCU

MFCM

1442

Line Printer

2501

D

isk

Tape

Device

lndependent

C RT/Keyboard

3741

The

labels given

to the

fields

in

these

figures

are

the labels

generated

by the offset macro instruction

$DTFO. Dis_

placements

are hexadecimal

numbers

which

refer

to tne

rightmost

byte

of the field;

length

is

specified

in bytes.

Addresses

in

the

DTFs

point

to the

leftmost

byte

of the

referenced

area.

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFDEV

$D

F

UPS

SDFATl

$DFAT2

$DFCHA

$DFCHB

$DFAR

R

$DFXRS

$DF

LRA

$DFCMP

0

1

2

F

7

I

B

D

E

1

I

Z

z

1

Device

code

MFCUi (primary

hopper of MFCU)

=

X'F0'

MFCU2

(secondary

hopper

of MFCU)

=

X'F8'

External

indicators

Attribute byte 1

Bit On Meaning

0 Read

i Print

2 Punch

3 Card

image mode

Attribute

byte 2

Bit On Meaning

2 Device

is system

reader

3 Multiple buffers

4 EOF on multiple buffers

5 l. or /& read on last input operation

7 DTF has been oPened

Address

of next DTF in backward

chain

Address of next

DTF in forward

chain

Address recall

register

save area

(return

address)

XR1 save

area

(contents

of calling

program

register

1

)

Logical

record

address

Completion

code

Code

x'40'

x'41',

x'42',

Meaning

Successful

completion

Permanent

error

End

of

file indicator

Figure 17

(Part

1 of 2). MFCU

DTF

Def

ine the File Control Block 69

l'."'-

__I I

I FJ:rrrre I I)isulacenrcrrt

i 1..',rritl,

t-t

I

lil)fr{)P(tiilr

tai I i

:..

t:

,i;l(1,.':r.r,i

IOB

rrrl,l,

,-;'

i,,.til i ' :,r iriri',,:,;r

i-'t

!

r,1 i . , .. .. li i,,;

lrli

lrrl'.'r "l i{ ){.i,.'

{ rlt,

i, 1. ,,.1,rr,

i'l).

I) { t'

I0

1')

1,1

t{l

lu

i9

1/\

1il

ic

*--___"._"--_t

ra(,rl I,l lilc .jflen

2). lr4trCt.l

I)l l:

$r)FSrs I

I

$Dr,fln I

$t)

[: ft DA I

I

Sll F

irl\,r\, I

I

St)tP

I

r\ I

I

$DF:i.Jl()

i

I

$t)F() i

I

gr'Fn j

I

::t:::y

_1_

' ln(licittes

liel(l

is

{

iolrelTlPartTttt

Field

Name Displacement Length cotrtelrts

SDFDEV

$DFUPS

$DFAT1

$DFAT2

$DFCHA

$DFCHB

$DFAR

R

$DFXRS

$DF

LRA

$DFCMP

0

1

z

3

5

l

I

B

D

E

1

I

2

1

Device

code

MFCMl (primary

hopper of MFCM) =

X'F0'

MFCM2 (secondary

hopper of MFCM) = X'F8'

External

indicators

Attribute byte 1

Bit on

0

1

z

4

5

6

Attribute byte 2

Bit On

2

4

5

7

Meaning

Read

Pri nt

Punch

Card image

mode

DTF

for MFCM

Interpret

mode

Print head 5 or 6 to be used

Meaning

Device is svstem

reader

Multiple

buffers

(data)

EOF

on multiple buffers

l. or l& read on last

input operation

DTF has

been

oPened

Address of next DTF in backward

chain

Address

of next DTF in forward chain

Address

recall

register save

area

(return

address)

XR1 save

area

(contents

of calling

program

register

1)

Logical

record address

Completion

code

Code

x'40

x'41

x'42

Meaning

Successful

completion

Permanent

error

End of file

Figure

18

(Part

1 of 2). MFCM

DTF

Def

ine the File Control Block 7'l

Field

Name Displacement Length t"".** _ _

Operation

code

Bit

On

0

1

4

6

if

Stacker

select

toB

Meaning

Read

rn nl

Pu

rrch

Defer

operation

Card image

No feed

Four

tier

printing

Read l/O area addressr

Punch

l/O area addressr

Print

l/O area

addressr

Number

of lOBsl

O-byte

(device

address)

R-byte

Read

length

t

Punch

length

Pri nt I ength

Print

head

select

Indicator

byte

Bit On Meaning

0 Previous

operation was

print

1 Feed

required

before

print

2 Read

already completed

3 First-time

bit

for

interpret

$DFOPC

$DFSTS

$DFCIA

$DF

RDA

$DFPNA

$DFPTA

$DFN

IO

$DFO

$DF

R

$DFRDL

$DFPN

L

$DFPTL

$DFPHS

$DF

IND

F

10

12

't4

16

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

20

1

I

2

z

1

I

1

I Indicates f

ield

is used f

or pre-open

DTF.

Figure

18 lPart

2 ol 2). MFCM DTF

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFDEV

$DFUPS

$DFAT1

$DFAT2

$DFCHA

$DFCHB

$DFAR

R

$DFXRS

$DFLRA

$DFCMP

$DFOPC

0

1

2

J

5

I

B

D

E

F

1

2

I

2

z

1

Device

code

X'50'

External

indicators

Attribute byte 1

Bit On

0

2

Attribute byte

Bit

On

2

?

4

5

Meaning

Read

Punch

Card

image

mode

Meaning

Device is system

reader

Multiple buffers

(data)

EOF

on multiple buffers

/. or /& read on last

input operation

DTF has been opened

Address of next DTF in backward chain

Address of next DTF in forward chain

Address

recall

register save area

(return

address)

XR 1 save area

(contents

of calling

program

register

Logical

record address

Completion

code

1)

Code

x'40'

x'41',

x'42',

Operation

code

Bit

on

0

1

2

4

q

Meaning

Successful

completion

Permanent

error

End of

file

Meaning

Read

Pri nt

Punch

Defer

operation

Card

image

mode

No feed

Figure 19 (Parr

1 of 21. 1442 DTF

Def

ine the

File Control

Block 73

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFSTS

$DFCIA

$DF

RDA

$DFPNA

$DFN

IO

$DFO

$DF

R

$DFPN

L

10

12

14

16

19

iA

1B

1D

z

2

J

1

2

Stacker

select

(N4

FC|-J,

MFCM, 14421

l0B addressl

Read

l/O area

addressl

Punch l/O area addressr

Number

of lOBst

O-byte

(device

address)

R-byte

Punch

length

t Indicates

f

ield

is

used

for pre-open

DTF.

Figure

19

(Part

2 of 21.

1442DTF

Field

Name

$DF

DEV

$D

F

IJPS

$DFAT1

$DFAT2

$DFCHA

$DFCHB

$DFAR

R

$DFXRS

SDF

LRA

$DFCMP

$DFOPC

$DFSKB

$Dt-sPB

$DFSKA

$DFSPA

Dispiacement

tr

7

9

B

l)

E

i0

ll

12

t3

---"- *tI

I

1

2

1

2

1

Contents

Devrce

cotlc

Code Mlearring

x'Eo' 1403

x'11' 3284

Exter rral irrtlica

tors

Attrihute

tryte 1

Bit On Meaning

1 Print

Attribute

byte

2

Bit On Meaning

6

1

Code

x'4

0'

x'41',

x'42'

x'48',

()lreratiorr

cocle

Bit On

Halt on

unprintable character

DTF tras

been

opened

Meaning

Succr.:ssf

r-r

I conrplet

ion

Permarrent

error

End of

file

Overf

lr-rw on

the

printet

Meanirrg

Pr irrt

Acldress of next DTF in backward chain

Address

of rrext D'l'F

in

forwarcl

chain

Address

recall

tegister

save

area

(returtr

address)

XB1 save area

(contents

of calling

progralll

register

l-ogir:al recottl

aclcitess

Cc-rrn

yrleti

ot

t

r:otlr:

1)

[.,ine nurnfler

to sl<iJr

tO hefore the

print operation

[,lurnlrcr of lirres to space

bef

ore the

[)rirlt

operatlon

[-i|]e nunrller

l.o

sl<ip

to aflcr

the

prirlt

operatior'l

Nurnber of lirres

to space

after the

print

operation

Figure

20 (Part

1 of 2)" Line

Printer

DTF

f)efine

the File Control Block 75

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFPO

$DFPR

$DFPIB

$DFPIO

$DFPRL

$DFOVF

$DF

LP

$DFPOS

$DFMSK

$D

FPGS

14

15

1l

19

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

20

1

z

a

z

1

O-byte

(device

address)

R-byte

IOB

addressr

l/O area

addressr

Record

length

Overflow

lirre

numberr

Lines

per

paget

Position

counter

Maxinrum

skip

valuer

Page

size

save

area

' Indicates f ield

is used for pre-open

DTF

Figure

20 (Part

2 ol 2). Line Printer

DTF

to

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFDEV

$DFUPS

$DFAT1

$DFAT2

$DFCHA

$D

FCH B

$DFAR

R

$DFXRS

$D

F LRA

$DFCMP

$DFOPC

.

I

,t

I

DevicecodeX'38'

1 I 1 | Externalindicators

tl

, I

t

I

Attributebytel

I I Bit on Meanins

I I t''^o"

ll0Read

| | 3 Card

image

mode

lr

3 | I I Attributebyte2

I I Bit

on Meaning

I I 2 Device

is svstem

readef

I I 3 Multiple

buffers

are

beinq

usecl

| | 4 End-of-f ile on

nrultipie

buffers

I | 6 l. or /& was

read

I I

7 DrF

has been

oPened

t

|

,

I

Address

of

chairr

I

t

|

,

I

noot.t,

of

in

forward

chain

I t |

,

I

nOOrets

recall

register

save

area

(return

addressi

I

t

|

,

I

xnr save

area

(contents

of

callins

prosram re-oister

1)

I " |

,

I

t-ooicat

recordaddress

I

t

|

,t

I

comoretioncode

lllcoaeMeanins

| | | x'+o' successfulcomPletion

| | | x'41' Permanent

error

I | | x'+z' End or

rire

i ' | | oo.,.ution.oo.

| | | eit

ctn Meanins

lll'Reacl

I I | 3 DeferoPeration

I | | + cardimagemode

| | | 5 Nofeed

Figure 21 (Part

1 of 2l.. 2501 Df F

Def

ine the

File

Control

Block 77

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFCIA

$DFRDA

$DFN

IO

$DFO

$DFR

$DFRDL

1a

14

19

,IA

1B

1t-

5

1

'l

1

IOB

address'

Read l/O area

addressr

Number

of lOBsr

O-byte

(device

address)

R-byte

Read

length

I Indicates

field is

used

for pre-open

DTF.

Figure

21 (Part

2 of 2). 2501 DTF

78

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFDEV

$DFUPS

$DFAT1

$DFAT2

l:",.:;

lil:l;

0

1

2

3

5

7

q

B

D

1

2

Device code:l

R1

(removable

disk

- 5444,drive

1)=

X'A0'

F1

(fixed

disk

- 5444,

drive 1)

=

X'A8'

R2

(removable

disk

- 5444,driue

2)

=

X'80'

F2

(fixed

disk

- 5444.

drive 2)

= X'88'

D1

(5445.

drive

'l)

=

X'CO'

D2

(5445,

drive

2)

=

X'C8'

D3

(5445,

drive

3)

=

X'D0'

D4

(5445,

drive 4)

=

X'D8'

External indicatorsr

Attribute

byte

1r

Bit On Meaning

0 Indexed

1 Consecutive

2 Direct

3 Multivolume

4 Input

5 Output

6 Update

7 Add

Attribute

byte

2r

Bit

On Meaning

3 MultiPle

buffers

7 DTF

has been

oPened

DTF

chain

pointer

A (backward)

DTF

chain

pointer

B (forward)r

ARR save

area

(return

address)

XR1 save

area

(contents

of object

program

XR1

)

Address of logical

record

(shared

l/O address

of logical

input record)1

I Indicates

f

ield

is

used

for preopen DTF.

|

'

risure 22 (Part

1 ot 71. Did( DTF (5704SC1 onlv)

Define

the File Control Block 79

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFCMP

$DFOPC

$DF

IOB

$D

FPR

B

$DFBKL

$DF

RCL

$DFPTR

$DFRO1

$DFXTA

$DFMVF

$DF

R02

E

F

11

IJ

15

17

19

1A

ic

1C

1D

1

z

2

z

2

1

2

(21

1

Completion

code

Code

x'40'

x'41'

x'42'

x'44'

x'50'

x'60'

x'62',

x'64'.

x'68'

x'70'

x'72',

Meaning

Normal

completion

Controlled

cancel

taken

on permanent

l/O error

End

of f ile

(input)

No record

found (out

of extent for direct files)

Key field

does not match

key in update

record

Duplicate

key

on attempted

load

or add

Keys

out of sequence

(attempted

load

or add)

Key

low for this volume

or high for any

volume

Key low for this volume

End

of extent

or end

of read

(output)

Key high for last

volume

Completion

codes

other than

X'40' are returned

before the data

manage-

ment function

is actually

completed.

Operation

Code:

Bit(s)

On

0

1

2

0,3

Meaning

Get

Put/add

or put/load

Put/u

pdate

Set

new

limits

Pre-open

address

of l/O areat

Post

open address

of IOB

Address

of current

process

IOB (dual

l/O only;

shared

l/O-address

of logical

output record).

Block

length

(length

of data buffer)t

Logical

record

lengthr

Data

block

index

(address

of next record)

R eserved

Data

start extent

Address

of direct MVF extent tablel

R

eserved

t lndicates field is

used for preopen DTF.

Figwe 22 (Part 2 ol 7). Disk DTF (57O4-SC1

onty)

80

*i ,t "VJt 'a

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFXTB

$DFNUM

$DFSWA

$DFNAM

$DFAT3

$DFAT4

$DFAT5

$DFSEC

$DFWAA

$DFWAB

$DFWAC

$DFWAD

$D

F RO4

$DFRMA

$DF

R06

$DF

RMB

1F

tr

20

28

29

2A

2B

zv

2D

2E

2F

30

JI

34

35

38

2

(2\

1

8

1

I

,l

1

3

1

3

Data end extent

(disk

address)

Number

of

extents

(direct

MVFIr

Scheduler

work

area

format-1 label sequence

number

File namer

Attribute byte

3t

Bit On

0

1

2

4

6

Attribute

byte

4r

Bit On

0

1A

t- I

Meaning

Addrout

Ordered

load

Random

Limits

End of limits

- call to open

Force

end

of volume

- call to close

Online

multivolume

Reserved

Meaning

Compiler

access

method

Reserved

Attribute

byte 5 (Bits

O-7 are

reserved)r

Number of sectors

to

write

(split)

Work

area

A (disk)

Work area B

(disk)

Work area

C

(disk)

Work

area

D (disk)

Reserved

Work area,

length

of

Reserved

first

part

of overlaP

record

Work area,

length of second

part

of overlap

record

I Indicates

f

ield is used

for preopen DTF.

Fiswe 22 (Part

3 of 71. Disk

DTF (5704SC1 only)

Def

ine

the

File Control

Block 81

Field

^::1"

$DFl'l

D

1

l)is;rlacement Length Contents

1

39

3A

Indicator

byte

Bit On

03

4

6

o

7

Indicator

byte

2

Bit

On Meaning

Meaning

R eserved

Pseudo-get

High

key loaded

(indexed

output

- MVF)

Low key was

found

Buffer

has

been

written

$L)

F t! D2

$DFND3

$DF

R07

SD

F RO8

$DFNXR

$D

FSPC

$D

F

R09

$DF

IOA

$DF

DAT

Encl

of Disk

D

T'F for consecuilve

output

Figure22 (Part

4 of 7). Disk

DTF (5704-SC1

ontyl

82

Indexed

random

update

- f

irst time indicator

First

record

olt

new

volume

MVF end

of file

End

of

all MVF files

Empty

file

(skip

initial

index

search)

was

add

End

of

file

has

been reached

EOF

on

this

get (limits

not

set)

Meaning

Index contains

adds

or new

entries

Reserved

Records

added

Out of sequence

add

(key

sort needed)

Current

process

buffer

contains

adds

Current

process

buffer

contains

updates

0

i

z

J

4

tr

6

7

I nd

icator

byte

Bit

On

0

|

-J

4

tr

o

7

R eserved

Reserved

area

1 (5444

only)

Disk

address

of next record

(CSDD)

Nurnber

of tracl<s irr

cylinder

R

eserved

Disk

address

save area

Poiirter

to

current

index

entry.

3C

3D

46

48

F

ieid

Narne

$t)F

R

1ti

$DFFOF

$DFCU

FI

$iti

F f'l I

$IJFR]2

$tI

F KXA

$D

t l<B

t:

$DF

t<.t

SD

F II'I

3

s;ii t-:

F{ x ll

$DF

11.[)

$t)FBI

X

$DFR14

$DFFI

X

$DFR15

49

.il\

4t)

tor direct

5:l

53

54

56

5B

5A

5B

5E

60

ol

oz

64

65

,i

:1

R ese rved

Resenved area

I

Disk

address

of

Displacenrent

I Lengtlr Contents

hyte

(5444

onlV

)

logir:al enrl

of f ile

(CSD)

ntl

I

i

lplll ir

(3)

uJrJate

Disk address

of

Poirrter

written

Arldress of uscr

AdrJress

oi l<ey

loilir:al

errrl of irrtlex

(CSD)

index

(pointer

1o

irext lrrrffer enlry)

's

key arear

in

core

(direct)

DTF

Address

oJ curtr:nt

key

(ittdex)

Aclriress of lriglr l<ey

(lirrrits)

flesetverl

Start extF?rt

ol irrrlr:x

(disk

adrlress

of first

A<ldr ess

of iurJc:< l(

ltJ

l{ey

ierrqth'

Rcsei

veri

l)ist:

arltlrel,s

oi crrrl of rrirli;x

(CSD)

l)i.1rl.rr:,,t1r,',,r,i

:,,/,tr

r,'Clttli

Ilr<ipx lrlrir:f,. size'

Beser

verl

j tlrsk arltlrr'.srrl

sl;rtl,rl

irrrl"r

(51,i51

I

(21

\2)

I

2

2_

I

.1

,)

1

')

1

t

r.aol(

)

' Indicates

field is

r.rsed for pre-open

DTF.

Fiqvre 22 (Parr

5 of 7). Disk DTF (5704-SC1

only)

B3

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFDTX

$DFABF

SDFAPR

67

69

6B

2

.)

Start of disk

track index

(5445)

disk

address

Address

of

add index

IOB

Add index

buffer

pointer

End

of Disk

DTF for

index

sequential

input

output,

and update

$DFIV]IX

SDF LOW

6D

6F

z

Address

of in-core

index

(random)r

Address

of low key (limit)

End

of Disk

DTF for

input

or update

with

limits

$D

F

LST

$DFHAD

$D

F

LOT

SDFHPK

$DFBYT

6F

71

75

(21

2

(21

2

Address

of last

key (indexed

sequential)

Address

of high

add key bucketr

Address

of save

area for current keyr

Address

of high

primary

key

Number

of bytes

in in-core

indexr

End

of Disk DTF for

index

random

input

and

uDdate

$DFAPT

$DFR16

$DFR17

$D F KXP

78

79

7C

z

1

Pointer

to next

record in

add buffer

R eserved

Reserved

area 1

byte (5444

only)

Disk

address

of end

of primary

index

End

of Disk

DTF for index random

add, retrieve

add. and update

add

$DFSLP

$DFR18

$DFSLA

7E

7F

82

2

1

Save

area

for

R

ese

rved

Save area for

last index disk

pointer

last index disk

address

End

of Disk

DTF for index

sequential

add and uodate

add

I Indicates field is

used

for pre-open

DTF.

Figure22 (Part

6 of 7). Disk

DTF (5704SC1 ontyl

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFSTA

$DFSEO

$DFNXT

$DFF1S

$DFF1

$DFAR

1

$DFXR

1

$DF

KEY

$DFTAB

$DFENT

$DFVOL

84

d5

86

87

\,o

t-tt

CE

DO

D1

z

1

63

2

,

1

Multivolume

file

table

pointer

Volume

sequence

number

of current

volume

Volume

sequence

number

of next

volume

Start of format-1

Format-

1 save

area

EOV

save area

EOV

save

area

Address

of high

key f

rom Format-7

Address

of multivolume

information

table

Number

of entries

in in-core

index

Number

of volumes

online

End

of Disk

DTF for multivolume

f

ile

processing

Figure

22 (Part

7 of 71. Disk

DTF (57O4SC1

onty)

Def

ine the File Control Block 85

Frelrl

Narne

$DFDEV

$D

FUPS

$flf-AT'l

iii::.'\ I "/

.$l-r

F I t

- lilill(:itTr

Fignr'.22a (Psrr i ef i', Li si,.

f'-iF i?"7i)4-SC2

r:nivi

flisplace

rrre

nt

il

r5.t iur l)l(, ()Deo [) l-i

L)cvice cotlt::t

R1

(sinrulation

area,

drive 1)

= X'A0'

F1

(simulation

area,

drive

1)

= X'A8'

R2

(simulation

area,

drive 2)

- X'80'

F2

(simulation

afea,

clr

ive

2)

= X'88'

D1 (3340

drive 1)

= X'C0'

D2

(3340

drive

2)

- X'C8'

D3/D31

(3340

clrive

3)

' X'DO'oi

(3344

dr

ive

3,

ir.igical

uriit 1)

=

X'D0'

It4lD4l

(3340

drive

4)

- X'DB'or

(3344

drive 4,

lt-'gical

unit 1)

=

X'D8'

D32

(3344

rir ive

3,

logical urrit 2l = X'D1'

D33

(3344

cJr

rve 3,

logical

urrit 3)

=

X'D2'

D34

(3344

drive

3,

logical unit

4)

=

X'D3'

D42

(3344

drive 4,

logit;al

rrrtit 2l =

X'D9'

D43

(3344

drive

4, logical

unit 3)

=

X'DA'

t)44

(3344

drive

4,

logical

unit

4)

='

X'DB'

lixterrral irrrlrcatorsl

Contents

Attribute br,rre

1r

Bit Orr

0

1

2

3

4

5

7

Altfrl)rte

ltyte'.2\

tsit On

r.)

1

3

,1

5

6

l\4earrirrg

Inril;xrlt.l

Currsecu

titre

ill or:.t

lltr !.t iv

olut

r'e

llrf){lt

(Julput

i

Jprlate

Atlci

Nlean irtg

ljev,c;e

indeperrder

ri DT

F

[rTF .rii.rcated

Device

rs

SYSIN

Mulripte

birffers

data

Dr:terred

open

iOV -

Olose

ignot'ed

bit

EOV Call

close

Operred

DJ'F

r;hain

p,.-rtttiet

A (backward)

Name I Displacement

a

1

2

1

Field

$DFCHB i T

$DFARR | 9

$DFXRS I N

$DF

LRA i t)

$DFCMP ] E

$DFOPC i F

$DFTOB I r r

$DFPRB i 13

$DFBKL I I S

SDFRCL I 17

$DFPTR i ts

Length i Cont"ntt

DTF

chain

pointer

B

(forward)r

AR R

save

area

(return

address)

XRi save area

(contents

of object

program

XR1)

Address

of logical

record

(shared

liO address of logical input

record)r

Cr-rmpletion code

:

Code Meaning

X'00' Record not found (requested

key low)

X'40' Successful completion

X'41' Permanent

error

X'42' End

of f ile

X'44' No record

found

X'50' Update key not equal to key

X'60' Duplicate

key on load

or add

X'62' Keys

out of sequence

on load

or add

X'64' Key

low for this volume

or high for any

volume

X'68' Key low for this volunre

X'7O' End

of extent

or end of reel

X'72' Key

high for

last volume

Completion

codes

other than X'40'are returned before

the data man-

agement f unction is

actually completed.

Operation code:

Bit(s)

On Meaning

x'30' Get

X'40' Put/update

X'60' Put/add

or put/load

X'90' Set

new

limits

Pre-open

address of l/O arear

Post

open address

of IOB

Address

of current

process

IOB (dual

l/O only;shared

liO address of logical

output record)"

Block length

{length

of data buffer)t

Logical record lengtfri

2 i Data

block index

(address

of next

record)

Pase

of G C21

-7608-2

lssued

29 September

1978

Bv

TNL: GN21-5649

'lndicates

field

usecl for

pre-open

DTF.

Figwe22a (Part

2 ot 71. Disk DTF (5704SC2 onty|

Define the

File

Control Block 81

Page

of GC21-7608-2

lssued

29 September

lgTg

By TIJ

L; G N21

-b649

Displacement

$DFSEG

$DFXTA

$DFMVF

$D

FOB

$DFXTB

$DFNUM

$DFSWA

$DFNAM

$DFAT3

$DFAT4 2A

$DFAT5

' Indicates

f

ield

used f

or preopen DTF.

Figure 22a (Part

3 of lr). Disk DTF (57O4-SC2

onty)

88

Contents

Fiie

ihare

segment

number

li s" atldress

of start

of data

AdcJress

of direct

MVF extent

tabler

Devrce- rnCependent

O

code

D sri

arldress

of end

of data

Nr,nrirer

of extents

(cjirect

MVFir

SLlre{ruler

work area

fornrat-1

label

sequence

number

F.t lrirflt€;

Ai r r

,

L;ute

byte

3r

:

1A

lot 1

:

I

1

l

12l

IL

IU

iD

IF

1F

20

zo

2g

tsrt

On

0

1

j

4

0

:

Atl ,l-rute

byte

4r

Brt On

Meaning

Addrout

Ordered load

Farrtiom

Lrmrts

End

of limits

- call

to open

Force

end

of volume

- call

to close

Orrline multivolume

Reserved

Meaning

Compiler

access method

Bypass

direct file

clear

3340s

supported

No verify

(main

data

area)

Reserved

Consecutive

add f

rom

start

of f ile

28

1

a

4.6

7

Att riitute

Bit

On

fl

1

4

E

6

oyle

5-:

Meaning

Format-

l for

this DTF

File

share

Copying

a

PTAM file

External

buffers

External

buffers

closed

Multivolume

f

ile

share

support

CCP

task

Reserved

Page

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued 29 September

1978

Bv

TN

L: GN21-5649

$DFSEC

$DFWAA

$DFWAB

$DFWAC

$DFWAD

$D

F RO4

$DF

R06

$DFRMA

$DFRMB

$DFND1

Displacement Length Contents

2C

2D

2E

2F

30

31

32

35

JU

39

Number

ilf sectors to write {spl!ti

Work

area

A (disk)

Work

area B (disk)

Work area C (disk)

Work

area D (disk)

Reserved

R eserved

Work

area. length

of first

pari,tf overlap

record

Work

area, length

of second

part

of overiap

record

Indicator

bvte 1

:

Bit On

0

1

I

3

4

5

F;

7

Indicator

byte 2

;

Bir On

0

1

2

3

4

5

7

lndicator

byte

3

:

Bit On

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

l

$DFND2

$DFND3

'lndicates

field

is

used for

pre-open

DTF.

Figure 22a (Part 4 of 7) . Disk DT F (5704SC2 onlyl

Meaning

BufJer ls

i.r:irri:i;f

",ra',

read

Switch builei-i

Or

pc,nlers

rn

subroutine

Ulldate

.)r-

i :':

s i'.

srr.liu DTF

Partiaiiv 1r

i

r.,,.j

ad,

j Dijifsr'rjritten

High

keV

ii:;r':,:rJ

{ir-rClxed

output - MVF)

Low kev

was

ior-rnd

Buffer has i)eerl

\4

r rttf

n

Meanrng

Indexerl

f

r:r{J{lm up(l:tir - frrst

time indicator

First

reci:',.'j,ir-,

itew

vi,!iurne

MVF

enri :t

l.it

End

of iir,

iri

..

i l;!.::,

Emptv fiii,

lsrrp

initi.tr

rndex

search)

PTeViOUS

t.it)it

.,rlrOfl

r*-;:S

add

End

oi f rlr:

l:.rs

5eci.;rrrrched

EOF

on tlrrs

tJCt

iitnl!t:

no1 set)

Meaning

Current

process

bullc;' contains

uprlate

Added

entrres in

input

rndex

buffer

Records

in ar

jd l-rr.rf fer $/e!-e updated

End

of cJata

rrr Input

l)uffer indexed

Records

atlderJ

Out of sequcnce acicl

(key

sort

needed)

Current

process

buffer

contains

adds

New

entrres in add

inrlex

buffer

Define the File Control Block

Pase

of GC21-76O8-2

lssued 29 September 1978

By TNL: GN21-5649

t Indicates f

ield

is

used for preopen DTF.

Figure22a (Part

5 of 7). Disk

DTF (5704SC2 onty)

1

End

of Disk

DTF for consecutive

output

End

of Disk

DTF for consecutive

input

and

update

Contents

Work area E (disk)

Physical

unit

simulation

area onry

4 | Disk

address

of next

record

(CSDD)

2 | Acldress

of trle

share DT

F

3 i Disk

acldress

save area

2 | Pointer

to current

index

entry

1 | Indicator

byte

5

Code Meaning

0 Get

has

not been done

1 Do not f lush buffers in r:lose

2 7 Reserved

Reserved

(simulation

area only)

Disk

address

of logical

end of {ile

(CSD}

Disk

address of logical end of index

(CSD)

Pointer

written index

(pointer

to next buffer

entry)

Address

of user's key

areal

Address

of key in core

(direct)

End

of Disk DTF for direct

Address

of current key (index)

Address

of high

key (limits)

Reserved

Start extent

of index

(disk

address of first

track)

Address

of index IOB

3D

41

+J

46

4B

49

$DFWAE

$DFPUN

$DFNXR

$D

FSH

R

$DFIOA

$DFDAT

$DFND5

$DFRl 1

4D

4F

51

tr?

$DFNXK

$DFKPR

$DFKAD

$DFKCR

53

5J

54

56

58

$DFCUR

$DFH

I

$DFR12

$DFKXA

$DFKBF

t2l

I

2

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

I $DFKL

I $DFND4

$DFKXB

$DFKD

$DFBLX

$DF

R

14

$DF

R

15

$DFF

LX

$DFDTX

$DFABF

$DFAPR

5A

5B

5E

60

61

62

63

65

67

69

frt'

2

I

2

1

z

2

Key

length

I

Indicator

byte 4

Code

0

1

2

3.7

Meaning

First

key invalid

in index

buffer

First

add

buffer

not filled

Add area

already

formatted

Reserved

Disk

address

of end

of index

(CSD)

Displacement

of key in recordr

Index

block

sizer

Reserved

Disk

address

of start

of index

(main

data

area)

Start

of disk

track

index

disk

address

(main

data

area)

Address

of add

index

IOB

Add index

buffer

pointer

End

of Disk

DTF for index

sequential

input

output,

and update

End

of_Disk

$DFLST

$DFHAD

$DFHPK

$DFBYT

$DFMIX

$DFLOW

6D

6F

2

Address

of in-core

index

(random)r

Address

of low key (limit)

TFfor input or pdate

with imits

Address

of last

key (indexed

sequential)

Address

of high

add key bucketr

Address

of high

primary

key

Number

of bytes in in-core

indexl

6F I '',',

11

l',

73

l',

75

12

End

of Disk

DTF for index

random

input

and upoate

I lndicates f

ield is

used

for pre-open

DTF.

Figure

22a

{Pan

6 of 7}. Disk

DTF (57O4SC2

onty)

Define the File

Control

Block 91

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFAPT

$DFR1

6

$DFR17

$DFKXP

77

78

l9

7C

z

1

'l

J

Pointer to next record

in add buffer

Reserved

area

(simulation

area

only)

Disk

address

of end

of primary

index

End

of Disk DTF for index random

add.

retrieve

add, and

update add

$DFSLP

$DFR18

$DFSLA

]E

7F

82

2

1

Save area

for last

index disk

pointer

Reserved

Save area

for last

index disk address

End

of Disk

DTF for index sequential add and

update

add

$DFSTA

$DFSEO

$D

F

NXT

$DFF1S

$DFFl

$DFAR

1

$DFXR1

$DFKEY

$DFTAB

$DF

ENT

SDFVOL

84

85

uo

87

C6

CB

CC

CE

DO

D1

1

I

1

63

2

z

2

1

Multivolume

f ile table

Pointer

Volume

sequence

number of current

volume

Volume

sequence

number

of next volume

Start of format-1

Format-1 save area

EOV save area

Address of high key from Format-7

Address of multivolume

information

table

Number

of entries

in

in-core

index

Number

of volumes

online

End

of Disk

DTF for multivolume

file

processing

-igure22a(?art7 ol 7). Disk

DTF (5704-SC2

only)

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFDEV

$DFUPS

$DFAT1

$DFAT2

$DFCHA

$DFCHB

$DFAR

R

$DFXRS

$DF

LRA

$DFCMP

0

1

2

3

E

7

9

B

D

E

1

'l

I

2

1

Device

code:

T1 (tape

unit 1)

=

X'60'

T2

(tape

unit 2)

=

X'68'

T3 (tape

unit 3)

= X'70'

T4 (tape

unit 4) = X'78'

External

indicators

Attribute

byte 1

Bit

On

1

2

5

Attribute

byte 2

Bit On

3

7

Meaning

Consecutive

Direct

Output

Meaning

Multiple

buffers

(data)

DTF has

been opened

Address

of next

DTF in

backward chain

Address of next DTF in forward chain

Address

recall register

save area

(return address)

XRl save

area

(contents

of calling

program

register

Logical record

address

Completion

code

1)

Code

x'40'

x'41'

x'45',

x'70'

x'90'

x'91',

X'FO'

X'F 1'

Meaning

Successful

completion

Permanent

error

Skip a bad

input

block

End of extent or end of reel

Wrong length record on input * short

Wrong length record on input - long

Option 0 to error message

Option 1 to error message

Figure

23 (Part

1 of 4). Tape

DTF

Define the File Control Block 93

Field

Name Displacement [-ength Contents

$DFOPC

$DF

IOB

$DFPR

B

$DF

LIO

$DFBKL

$DF

RCL

$DFPTR

$DFCR

L

$DFBCT

$DF

R03

$DFSWA

$DFNAM

F

11

13

15

11

19

1B

1D

1F

20

28

z

1

(21

2

z

I

1

.J

Operatiorr

code

Code

x'04'

x'06'

x'08'

X'OA'

X'OB'

X'OC'

X'OD'

X'OE'

X'1C'

X'1E'

x'40'

X'BO'

Meaning

Read

forward

Rearj backward

Write

tape

rnark

Rewind

Backspace fi le

Rewind and unload

Forward

space file

Backspace block

Forward

space

block

Variable

length

Fixed length

Pre-open

address

of l/O arear

Post-open

address of IOB

Address

of process

IOB

Length

of l/O arear

Block

lengtht

Record

lengthr

Poirrter

to logical record irr buffer

Current

record lerrgth

Block count

R eserved

SchedLrler

work area

format-1 inclex number

File

namer

t Indicates f ield is

used

for preopen Dl-F

Figure

23 (Part

2 ol 4). Tape

DTF

F

ield

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFAT3

$DFAT4

I

$DFAr5

I $DFHTC

2S

2A

2B

2C

1

Attribute byte

3

Bits 0 5 are

record

forrnat bits

Bit On lMeaning

0

1

3

4

5

6

l

Fixed length

Variable

length

Unblocked

recorrls

Blocked

lecords

Spanned

records

ASCllformat

D.

ASCII

data management

ASCII

f

ile

(post-open)

present (pre-open)

AttribLrte byte

4

Bit On Meaning

0,1 Rewittci

at close

0 Unload at

close

1 l-,eave

at close

2 Basic

ar:cess

rnethod

3 Standarrl

l:rbel tal;e

4 l-r:rrate

rnt.rtle

5 I'll rnttltiv,rl'.trne outl'il1

6 t-)

I

F:

closetl

tly FOV

7 llsr.'l

r';u,rred

ori

111i5

Irie

Attribute

t-lvte 5 (Bit:;

0 7 ate rr,'served)

Error

halt cor.le

Code

x'1

0'

x'1 t'

x'12'

x'24'

x'21'

x'40'

x'41'

x'50'

x'60'

x'6r'

x'62'

x'70'

Meaninq

No

qet

operatiott

t;ot'le

Wronq

lergllt tecord

on

ttlllttt

Wronq

length hlock

No ptit

operatiorr

code

Wrong

length

record on outlrut

Permarrent

tape write

r:rrrtt

at

close

Wrong

block coitnt

Permanent tape

read

errc'r

a1 close

No f

ile statemen

t

Filr:

rrot allocated

Not enotrglr

buffer space

No basic operation

code

Figure 23 (Part

3 of 4). Tape

DTF

Def

ine

rhe

File Control

Block 95

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFSOU

$DFOST

$DFWRA

$DFWRB

$DFWRC

$DFWRD

$DF

ROs

$DFND1

$DFND2

$DFHSA

$DFSR

1

$DFSVD

$DFSVE

2D

2E

30

32

34

36

38

39

3A

3C

3E

40

42

1

2

1

2

Format-1

sequence number

ASCII

buffer offset byte

Code

x'80'

x'00'

Meaning

Offset is

4 bytes for block length

No offset

specified

Bits

1-7

are

reserved for offsets

of 0-99.

Work

area

A

Work

area B

Work

area

C

Work

area

D

Reserved

Indicator

byte 1

Bit On Meaning

IOB

not waited

on

Truncated

block

Empty variable

block

Error reading

trailer label

Write

trailer label

DTF closed by EOV

EOV return via

open

No end

of file

reached

Indicator

byte 2 (bits

0-7 are

reserved)

Halt routine

save

area

EOV

register

1 save area

EOV

chain DTF address

save area

EOV

save area

Figure

23 (Part

4 of 4). Tape

DTF

96

Field

Name Di$placement Length Contents

$DFDEV

$DFUPS

$DFAT1

$DFAT2

$DFCHA

$DFCHB

$DFAR

R

$DFXRS

$DF

LRA

$DFCMP

5

7

o

B

D

E

0

1

2

3

I

1

'l

1

2

1

Device code

X'40'

External indicators

Attribute byte 1

Bit On Meaning

0 Indexed

1 Consecutive

2 Direct

3 Multivolume

4 Input

5 Output

6 Update

7 Add

Attribute byte 2

Bit On Meaning

0 Device

indePendent

DTF

3 Multiple

buffers

(data)

5 /& read on last

inPut operation

7 DTF has been oPened

Address of next

DTF in backward

chain

Address

of next

DTF in

forward chain

Address

recall

register

save area

(return

address)

XR1 save area

(contents

of calling

program

register

1)

Logical

record

address

Completion

code

Code Meaning

X'40' Successful

comPletion

X'41' Permanent

error

X'42' End

of file

X'7O' End of extent or end of reel

Figure24 (Part 1 of 51. Device Independent DTF

Define

the File Control Block 97

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFOPC

$DF

IOB

$DFPRB

$DFBKL

$DF

RCL

$DFPTR

$DFPOV

$DF

RO 1

$DFXTA

$DFOB

$DF

RO2

$DFBCT

$DFXTB

$DFSWA

$DFNAM

$DFAT3

F

1'l

13

15

17

19

1A

IA

1C

1D

1F

20

28

29

2

1

(1)

2

I

(1)

2

'l

a

1

I

Operation

code

Bit On Meaning

0 Get

1 Put

Pre-open

address

of l/O arear

Post-open

address

of IOB

Address

of process

IOB

Block

lengthr

Record

lengthl

Pointer

to logical record

in buffer

Printer

overflow

Reserved

Disk address

of start of data

O-byte

(device

address)

Reserved

Block count

Disk

address

of end

of data

Scheduler

work area

format-1 index number

File

namel

Attribute

byte 3

Bits

0-5 are record format

bits

Bit On

0

'l

2

3

4

5

6

Meaning

Fixed length

Not used

Unblocked records

Blocked records

Spanned

records

ASCII format

D

ASCII data management

present (pre-open)

ASCllfile

(post-open)

t Indicates

f ield

is

used

for preopen DTF.

Figure

24 (Part 2 of 5). Device lndependent DTF

98

$DFAT4

$DFAT5

$DFHTC

$DFSEC

$DFWAA

$DFSOU

$DFWAB

$DFWAC

$DFWAD

$DF

R04

$DFRMA

Attribute byte 4

Bit

on

0,1

0

1

2

J

4

5

o

7

Attribute byte

5 (Bits

O-7 are reserved)

Error

halt

code

Meaning

Rewind

at close

Unload

at close

Leave

at close

Basic

access

method

Standard

label

tape

Locate

mode

No multivolume

output

DTF closed

by EOV

Reel

opened

on

this file

Meaning

No get

operation

code

Wrong

length

record

on input

Wrong

length

block

No put

operation

code

Wrong

length

record

on output

Permanent

tape

write

error

at close

Wrong

block

count

Permanent

tape read

error

at

close

No file

statement

File

not allocated

Not enough

buffer

space

No basic

operation

code

Code

x'1

0'

x'11',

x'12'

x'20'

x'21'

x'40'

x'41',

x'50'

x'60'

x'61',

x'62'

x'70'

Number

of sectors to write (split)

Work

area

R (disk)

Format-1 sequence number

(tape)

Work

area

B (disk)

Work

area

C (disk)

Work

area

D (disk)

R

eserved

Work

area

(disk)

Figure

24 (Part

3 of 5). Device Independent DTF

Define the File

Control Block

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DF

RO6

$DF

RMB

SDFNDl

$DFND2

$DFND3

I

-""^

|

$DFR08

l

*orr*,

I :",,--

3C

3D

3F

41

42

35

38

39

3A

3B 1

1

(1)

1

2

1

3

I

Reserved

Work

area

(disk)

Indicator byte 1

Bit On Meaning

0 IOB

not waited on

1 Truncated

block

2 Empty

variable block

3 Error

reading trailer

label

4 Write trailer

label

5 DTF closed

bY

EOV

6 EOV return

via oPen

7 No end

of file reached

Indicator byte 2

Bit On Meaning

0 Device=5444

Disk

1 Device=5445

Disk

2 Device=TaPe

3 Device=M

FCM

4,5 Reserved

6 IOB

waited

on indicator

7 Write

indicator

Indicator byte

3

Bit On Meaning

0 3 Reserved

4 Short record

on unit record

device

5-7 Reserved

L

I Reserved

I

I Halt routine save

area

I

I Reserved area

1

byte

(5444

onlY)

I

I EOV register 1 save

area

I

I EOV chain DTF address

save

area

I

I Disk address

of next record

Figure 24 (Part

4 of 5). Device Independent DTF

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$D

FSPC

$DFSVE

$DF

R09

$DFIOA

$DFDAT

$DFR1O

$DFR1

1

$DFEOF

$DFDV

I

43

44

41

49

4A

4B

58

1

(1)

1

J

z

1

10

Nurnber

of tracks in

cylinder

EOV save area

R

eserved

Disk

address

save area

Pointer

to current index entry

buffer

pointel

area

(split)

R eserved

sa

ve

Reserved

area nrinus 1 byte (5444

only)

Disk

address

of logical

end of file

Reserved for independent DTF

Figure

24 (Part

5 of 5), Device

Independent

DTF

Define

the

File

Control Block 101

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFDEV

$D

F

UPS

$DFATl

$DFAT2

$DFCHA

$D

FCH B

$DFAR

R

$D

FX

RS

$D

F LRA

$DFCMP

0

1

2

5

I

D

E

1

2

a

z

2

I

Device

code X'10'

External

indicators

Attribute byte 1

Not used

Attribute byte 2

Bit On Meaning

Device ir.rdependent

DTF

DTF has

been allocated

Device is

system

input device

Multiple

buffers

(if

this bit is off

, it indicates

the

first

entry

to CRT data management)

DTF has been

opened

Address

of tlre next DTF in backward chain

Address of next DTF in forward chain

Address recall register

save area

(retunr

address)

XR1

save area

(contents

of calling

program

register 1)

Logical record

address

Completiorr code

Code

x'40'

x'41'

x'42'

Meaning

Successf

u I completior-r

Permanent error

End of

file

indicator

Figure

25 (Part

1 of 2). CRT/Keyboard DTF

102

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFOPC

$DFCLB

$DFCSB

$DFCRA

$DFCLI

$DFCSI

$DFCOE

$DF

ECB

$DFOCB

$DF

REO

$DFADR

F

11

13

15

17

19

1A

,IA

21

22

24

1

z

2

I

(1)

7

I

2

Operation

code

Bit On

None

0

0,1

0,3

o,1,2,3

1

q

4,5,6,7

Meaning

No operation

Input only

Output/lnput, Put/Get

Input on request

Clear zone

portion

of OPC

Output only

Do not blank buffer before operation

Clear

numeric

portion

of OPC

Length

of data, output

Start

position,

output

Address

of data, input

Length

of data. input

Start

position

of input

Console

queue

element

Console

queue

element

Console

queue

elemenl

Console

queue

element

Address

of DTF

(coE)

ECB

O-code

request

code

Figure

25 lPart

2 ol 2). CRT/Keyboard DTF

Define

the File

Control Block 103

Field

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFDEV

$DFUPS

$DFAT1

$DFAT2

$DFCHA

$DFCHB

$DFAR

R

$DFXRS

$D

F

LRA

$DFCMP

0

1

z

5

l

I

B

D

E

1

I

z

2

z

2

Z

1

Device code:l

3741

= X'40',

External

indicatorsl

Attribute byte

1r

Bit On

1

4

5

Attribute

byte

2r

Bit

On

0

1

2

3

7

Meaning

Consecutive

I nput

Output

Meaning

Device

independent

Allocated

System input

Multiple buffers

DTF has been

opened

DTF chain

pointer

A (backward)

DTF chain

pointer

B

(forward)l

ARR save

area

(return

address)

XRl save area

(contents

of obiect

program

XR1)

Address

of logical

recordr

Completion

code

Code

x'40'

x'41'

x'42'

Meaning

Normal

completion

Controlled

cancel taken

on permanent

l/O error

End

of file

(input)

I Indicates field is used for pre-open DTF

Figure

26 (Part 1 of 21. 3741 DTF

F

ield

Name Displacement Length Contents

$DFOPC

$DF

IOB

$DFPRB

$DFBKL

$DFRCL

$DFPTR

$DF

RO1

$DF

XTA

$DFIVIV

F

SDF

R02

$DFXTB

$DFNUM

$DFSWA

$DFNAM

F

I

13

15

11

19

,IA

'lc

1D

1tr

1F

20

28

2

1

z

1

I

12l

1

2

(2\

1

Completion codes other

than X'40' are

returned

ment

function is

actually completed.

Operation

Code:

Bit(s)

On Meaning

0 Get

1 Put

Pre-open

address

of l/O areal

Post-open

address of IOB

Address

of current process

IOB

Block length

(length

of data

buffer)

I

Logical

record lengthr

Reserved

R

eserved

Reserved

R eserved

File namer

before the data manage-

' Indicates

field is used for pre-open

DTF

Figure 26 lPan 2 of 21 . 3741 OTF

Def

ine

the File

Control Block 105

Appendix

C: Input/Output

Blocks

DISK

INPUT/OUTPUT

BLOCK

You

build

the disk

IOB

by issuing

the

gIOBD

macro

instruction.

lf

you

use

$RDD,

$WRTD.

or

gWAIT

in

your

program,

you

must

use

the

$IOED

macro

instruction

to

assign

the

offset in

the lOB.

The format

of

the IOB

and

the labef

s

assigned

to the f

ields

are shown

in Figure

27.

lOBs

for the

5444

Disk

Storage

Drive,

the

5445

Disk

Storage.

the

3340

Direct

Access

Storage

Facility.

and

the

3344

Direct

Access

Storage

are 30

bytes

long.

106

I igrrrr:2:'

(Pal 1 r,l 4]. Disk !OB Format

Input/OutputBlocks 107

.iLrcrtes

{()r

all dsvit:t:s

0-F-f a.",r'* -

I

-1

I Wail/trost

lryte l-ryte'i ot tlrree'byte

ECB

I

I Cornr;letron

cocie bytr: 2

of E-uB.

I

I The

third

byte

of ECij A orre'byte

currpletion

code inclicating

the

stal

I oi the operation

just

perfornred.

You should check

this byte before

I assuming

that

the

rlala trarrsfer has ot:crrrred. Before the wait routine rs

I called, each bit rn this iryte

has

tlre

follornrirrrt rneanirtg:

I

I Bit On lVlearring

I

| 0 Scel<

has l)ilert slart(;rl ori llrc

t)ltetatiorl reqtresie{l

I trr,r 1l,t: lOB.

i 1 Tlre operation requeslecl

is cornplete

2 DatJ

lrallsfef rs

pentlinq

ctn this

operatlon.

3 Dat;i transfer

has

been

started on

this opel ation.

4 A r,vait ccr;urs for this

IOB

5 lf bit

7 is also on, there is an

error on an associated

IOB; it

bit

7 is olt, a scarr

equal

has

been

found.

ti llle

sirdir

is not

satrstied.

7 A l)crllancnI

error has occutred

on this IOB

or

arr

assooratod

lOB.

After- the

wait routine

fras finisfrr:d, the code

irr this byte

has

the

tolIowing

meanirr.r;:

Code

x'4

(i'

x'41'

x'42_'

x'44'

x'45',

Meaning

Suocrlstlri rli)lr rl)liltl()l

I

Perniartr:nt

l/O errc,r

.

Scarir,cit

s;tislied.

Scarrcqual

fciuird.

Pcrrirlirrti,trt

urr()l {r| .rrr assrir;iatr'cl

loB

Ad<lress of tllL.

nrrxl IOB irr

tire

chairt. lOBs

are clraineci

orily

wl-retr

til:r

file requrres

r-rrore tltari

rr ,r lOB. I irrs

at,;a

ts always

pfeselrt,

eveit

whl;i

clrairrinq is

not

r-rsed. Wlrerr the

ol)eratiort specifiecl

by tlris IOB

is

conrplete, this

area c;onlairts

the

disk

address

last used

(cylinder/sector

f

or the

5444,

headlrecord

tor the 5445).

Tirrr i: byte of the sliirt

llO(SlO) eolnmarrd. Yott

set

this

l)y1e thr()uEl

the

$IOBD macro nrstfrtctiori.

Tire

[:t.bvie

of the

sia'i lr'i-) corntir"rrd.

lI fr-rrllrer

iletirres

the

opcrattr,rr

requested.

Figure 28 shows tite

p'r:;srllle

R-byte settirlgs

for the

SIO

c()tntniino.

Label Displacement I Length Contents

$IBEID I | 1 | ERP

module

displacement lD.

$IBDAT I B I Z I Address

of the leftmost

byte

of

your

data

area.

You

provicle

this

acldress

Through

the

$IOBD

macro

instruction.

$IBSNS I D I Z I The

area

used

by

the input./output

stipervisor

tr) contain

device status

sense infornratiorr.

The

contents

nt this

area are described in Fiqure

29.

$IBFLG I f I t I Indicates

special handling

required

for l/O

operations

through the various

bit settings.

You set bits

0 and

4 through

the

$IOBD macro instruction.

lf no

special handling

is required this

byte mr:st

be set to X'00'. The

bit settings

are:

Bit On Meaning

5

o

No r.ecovery

is

to be

attempted

is

a

data check,

missing

address mark. no record

iound.

or track condition

check error condition

occurs.

No verification

is

to be

done on write operations.

No error logging

is

to be

done

if any disk l/O error

should occur. Control is to be returned

to the calling

routt ne.

Disk IOS

should not use

the C and S bytes in

the

lOB,

but should

pick

up

the F,

C,

and

S bytes

at the end of

ther IOB for use in this

operation.

This

bit should be

used

only by the

system control

program.

The

calling f outine is not using disk data management;

therefore.

this IOB

is not associated with a

DTF.

There

is no load l/O of the

disk

file

data

register

(DFD

R).

Error logging

is in

progress.

A data transfer operation involving

an

alternate track is

In progress.

l;

$IBERR I F | 1 | The

area

used

by disk IOS

to count the number

of retrir:s

required

to

complete

the l/O request.

$I

BTCB

$IBWRK

'11 2 | Task

control block (TCB)

arlilress.

12 1 | IOS

partial

completion code.

Figute 27 (Part 2 ol 4). Disk IOB Format

108

Label Displacement I Length I Contents

$|BFL2 | 13 | 1 | Flag

byte for use with the 5445. The meanings of the bits are:

I I I Bit on Meanins

til

I | | 0 SPecialseek

I I I t superloB

I I I z Not used

(5704

SC1)

I I | 23 Specifyoperation(5704-SC2)

I | | where: X'11' Scan

lll x'lo'write

I i I x'ot' Read

lli X'0O'Seek

I I I s Not used

(5704

sc1)

lil4Reserved

| | | 5 Not

used

(5704

SC1)

I | | 5 C/S address

must be converted

but not Q-byte

I I | (5704-sc2)

| | I 6 Noseek

| | | t LonsrormloB

ttl

ttt

$IBCC I lq I t I The hexadecimal

value of the

cylinder address

where

the operation

begin

(5445

only).

You set this

byte through

the

$IOBD macro

instruction

| | | is

to besin

(5445

only).

| | | You

set this byte

through

the

$IOBD

macro instructiort.

ttl

$IBHH I t5 | 1 I T.he hexadecimal

value of the

head

address

where

the operation

is to

$I

BCB 15 | (1)

$IB

R

$I

BSB 16 | (1)

$I

BN

$I

BNB

The

hexadecinral

value

of the cvlinder address

where

the operation

is

to begin

(5444

only).

You set this

byte

through the

$IOBD macro

instructiotr.

The

hexadecimal value of the record

address where

the

operation

is to begin

(5445

only).

You set this byte

through

the

$IOBD macro

instruction.

The hexadecimal

value of the beginning

sector

address

of the

operation

(5444

only).

You set this

byte through

the

$IOBD macro

instruction.

16

17 I t I The nunrber of records minus one,

in hexadecimal,

involved

in

the

data transfer

(5445).

You

set this

byte

through

the

$IOBD macro

instruction'

11 I ttl I Ttre number of sectors

minus one,

in

hexadecimal,

involved

in the

data transfer

(54441.

You set this

byte through

the

$IOBD rnacro

instruction.

Figure

27 (Part

3 of 4). Disk IOB Format

Input/Output

Blocks 109

!'!:l

SIBDN

T)

$!RDCt]

$I BD IF

Displacement

19

1B

1D

tr-f

')

?

I

J

.Ilte

rlisk

rlala rnarratrernerrt

chain

poirrter

(5r1,14

arid h44rJ).

li rorrtainr

Ilte

arlrJrr;.;:,

trl tlre secr.lrrrl

of tlre tr,vo

lf

)[Js

useri

f

lr tlrlrlrl,,

ilrrf

fer t.;11

Tfre

a<Jclress

of tfre

Dl-F

associated

with this

IOB

Figure

27 (Part

4 of 4). Disk lC)B Formal

r10

tlo

Operation

SIO R-Byte

Settings

iHex) I nterpretation

5444 Settings

Corr tro i

R

eacJ

Write

- -t*-

I

j

I

00 Sec

k

r.lO

it't

0?

o3

Data

lderrtrtrer

D

r:l!J nost ic

Verif

y

Sca

tt aio

il 1

at'.)

Da ta

ldentifier

EtiLral

LOW Or equal

Hir^h or cclual

5445 Settings

Control

h eaal

-r*.

Sca

n

I

l

I

o0

{}1

See

k

tlecalibrate

{i0

0:i

Key-da ra

Verify key'clata

oi) i

-+--

I

K e

y'da1a

CO

01

{)?

Key-data

eclual

l(fV-clata

low or eqLral

Key data high or erlual

Figure

28. R-Byte Settings

TlMER INPU

/OUTPUT BLOCK Format of Timer IOB When DATE-N is Specified

lf you use

the

$SlT" $TOD.

or SRll-nrircf o instructions

in Bytes Contents

your program, you rnusl

builcl

the tinrer IOB

by issuing the

$TIOB macro

instruction. Tlle

format

of the

tirner IOB 1 Reserved

varies depending

on whether

lf ,Al-i: Y or DATE-N is

speci. 2l Time

fied. g Return cocje

I 1 0 Reserved

Format of Tinter IOB When trATE.Y is Spet:if

iecl

Bytes Contents

1 Reserved

2-7 Time

8-

1

3 Date

Input/OutputBlocks 111

Pa,qe

of GC2 1,760i3,2

lssuert

29

Septe:rnber

l9/8

By iNL GN21-564-.i

Device i Byte Bit 0n

!

I

t1

I

i

1

5

o

1

5444

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

0

1

?-

3

,1

5

6

I

Scan equal

Access

arm at cylinder O

Fnd of cytrnder

Sr:ek

busy

Hurrdred

cylinders

Device

overrun

Status address A *

Status

address

Bn

Format error

!ntervention required

l',4rssing

acldress

mark

Equrpment check

Data check

No record found

l!o-op

Over ru n

i-l

I

2

J

5

o

7

Disk clr ive

error

LJ

nsafe

Seek 'l complete

Seek 2 complete

Data r:peration complete

End of cylrnder has

been reacneo

Scan equal

Disk <irive

lD* *

l/O no-op

(single

only)

lntervention

required

Missing

address

mark

Equtpnlent

check

Data

check

No record

tound

Track

conditrorr

check

Seek check

+

lndr{jater

which drrve

on the

5444

Bits

6.7 OO-Drive

1

Ol

- Drive

2

had ldst data tra'lsfer:

0 Drive

1

1 Drive 2

Figure 29. Device Status Sense Information

112

Appendix

D: Macro

lnstruction

Summary

Chart

Figure

3O is

a summary

chart containing

all

valid

macro

processor

instructions.

The macro

instructions

are listed

in

alphabetical

order. In

addition to the name,

three items

are

given

for each

macro instruction:

o Format

of the instruction

with all

valid

operands

a Function

of the macro instruction

a Maximum number of statements

generated

For

more

detailed information

on any

of the macro

instructions, see Chapter 2: Macro lnstruction Statements.

Pase of GC21-7608-2

lssued

29 Seotember

1978

Bv TNL: GN21-5649

Macro

Instruction

Summary

Chart 112.1

Page

of GC21

-76O8-2

lssued

29 September

1978

By

TNL: GN21-5649

This

page

intentionally

left

blank

112.2

Name

o{ Macro

Instruction

Namcl

|

$ALoC I lDTf addressl

lNamel

l$CHK I ICKL-d(trtressl

lNamel | $CKr DTF-address

[,SK

I

P-YA] t,R

EOK-YlN

l

[,FTN,Y/N

I t,LAST-Y/N]

lNamel

ISCLoS I lDlF-acldressl

$COMN

tNamel

I

scoEP

I IKEY-number l

lName]

| $CTLT I iDTF

addressl

LopC-codel

lNamel

l$DATE | [LABEL

addressi

lNamel

| $DTFC I loBA-a.ld'.ss,

NtoB-numbel

[,DEV-code]

[,UP-mask

I [,CH

N-adclress]

[,RCAD-address]

[,OPC-code]

[,DEFERY/N]

t,CARDI

Y,/N]

[,PRrNr4-Y/Nl

i,FEED

Y/N]

[,STACKR

number] [.READA

address]

[,PUNCHA-acldress]

[,PR

I

NTA-address]

l,READL,numberl

[,PUNCH

L,number]

[,PRINTL

number]

[,PRHEAD-maskj

[,ALIGN

YiN]

lNamel | $DTFD I AC{ode,RECL-number,NAME-filerrarrre,

B LK

L-number,lO

-add

ress

[,D

I SK

-544415

445

13340)

[,UP-mask]

I,BUFNO-1 /21

[,MVF.N/Y]

t,LlM-N/Yl t,ORD-N/Yl

[,BlN-N/Y]

[,CH

N-address]

[,RCAD-address]

[,ENT-number]

[.MVFN-number]

l,K

EYL-numberl

[,KEYD-number]

[,K

EYA-address]

[,MV

FT-address]

[,MSTX-address]

[,lBLKL-number]

[,ADK

EY-address]

[,EOVK-address]

I,SHR.Y/N]

[,EXTBUF-Y/N]

I f iOur"

30 (Part

1

of 6). Macro Instruction

Summary

Charr

Function

Assigns

the

f

ile indicated

by the DTF

to your

prog

ra m.

Tests

f

or l/O operation

completion in the

check list.

Generates an entry for

the check

list

to be

used

by the

check routine.

Prepares

the devi ce

Generates equates.

for job termination.

Generates a parameter list for a program func-

tron key request.

lssues

control commands to the tape device.

Retrieves system date.

Builds

a DTF for a card file

Builds

a DTF

for

a

disk

file

The

SHR'Y/N

and EXTBUF-Y/N

parameters

apply

only to Program

Number

5704-SC2.

Page

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued

29 September

1978

By

TNL: GN21-5649

Maximum

Num-

ber of Statements

Generated

8

None

10

11

4

33

210

Macro Instruction Summarv

Chart 1'l 3

Pase

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued

29 September

1978

By TNL: cN21-5649

Name

of Macro

Instruction

IName] |

$DTFI I NAME-filename,RECL-number,lO-adctress

t,AC-lN/OUTI

[,BLK[.-number]

[,RCAD-address]

[,BUFNO-1

/2]

[,CHN

-address]

[,UP-nrask

]

lNarnel

|

$DTFK I NnME-tilename,RECL-number,lO-address

t,AC-Vol

[.RCAD-address]

i,BUFNo-1

/21

[,CHN-acldress]

[,UP-mask]

lNanreJ

|

$DTFS | [pUTDAT-address]

[,pUTLoC-number]

[,UP-mask]

[,CHN-address]

[,PUTLEN-number]

[,OPCrode]

[,GETDAT-address]

[,GETLOC-number]

[,GETLEN-numberi

{,BLANK.y/N]

lNamel

|

$DTFT

I wAME-fitename,tO-address,BLKL

number.

RECL-number

[,UP-mask]

[,AC,tN/OUT]

I,CHN-addressl

t,BAStC

Y/N

j

I,RCAD-address

I I,MODE-LbCATE/MCvE

l

I.MBUFF

Y/Ni [,RECFMccde]

[,LlOA-numfrr] i,SPAN-Y/Nl L,CODE-A/El

[,OSET,B/numberl

t,END-c;duJ

i.MVF

y/N

INameJ

l$FIND I NAME-modute

[,FtND-address]

t,pACK

p/Sl

tNamel |

$FTCH

| runMe

moCute

namel

,pACK

p/Sl

Figure

30 (Part

2 of 6). Macro Instruction

Summarv

Chart

Fu nction

Builds a DTF f or a devace independent f ile.

Builds a DTF

for a3141 file

Establishes labels

for fields

on a DTF

Builds a DTF for a printer f ile

Builds a DTF {or

a

CRT frlt,.

Builds

a DTF for

a rape file

Terrninates

the job and returns

control to the

supervisor.

Provides

the disk address

of a ntodule in the

O library.

Frnds

and loads

an O module and passes

control 1()

it.

Maximum

Num-

ber

of Statements

Generated

None

88

lo

JJ

37

67

21

INamel | $DTFP I RCAD address,lOBA-address,lOAA-address,

OV

F

L-number,PAGE-number

[,DEVcode]

[,UP-mask]

tHUC

Y/N

I [,CH

N-adctress]

t,PR

INT-Y/N

I l,SK

IPB-numberl

[,SPACEB-number]

[,SKlPA-number]

[,SPACEA-number]

[,Ft

EC

L-number]

ICANC

E L-NOR

N/IA

L/IMM

ED/CONTR

L]

114

Name of Macro

Instruction

INamell $GETCI IDEV-code]

[,DTF-address]

I,EOF-addressl

[,ERR-address]

t,OPC-Y/N

l

[,READL-number

] l,CARDl

-Y/N j

[,STACKR-number

]

lNamell $cETD IACcode ] t

tEBAC"codel

I

.DTF

-addressl

[,ER

R-address]

,EOF'addressl

[,NFR

address]

LSTV'adrJressl

I NOKY-address]

I

DTF-addrr:ss]

[,RCAD-address]

[,ERR-address]

[,EOF

-addressl

lNarnel | $c

ETK EOF address

[,DTF

adclress]

[,ERR,address]

INarne]

| $GETS | [DTF

acldressl

I,GETDAT

ad<1ress]

[,GETLEN-number]

I.GETLOC

numt)er

I

[.BLANK

Y/N] l,OPC,tN/tNR/Nl

[.EO

F

-address

]

IName]

l$GETT I MODULE rramel,DTF

a(idressI

I,RCAD-addressl

[,OPC-Y/N

I

[,ERR-address J [,EOF

ad<jress]

lNamel | $GPC I tOf V code i [.DTF

acldressl

I.OPC

corle]

[,DEFER,Y/N

] [,CARDt-Y/N

I

[,PRrNT4-Y/N

j I,FEED-Y/N ]

[,STACKR-number ] {,H

EAif L.rrLlmL)er

I

[,PUNCH

L-nurnber

] l,PR

INTL-nurnber

i

l,PR

H

EAD maskl [,EOF,i:ddress]

[,ERR-actdress]

IName]

| $rOBD I IDISK-5444i544513340]

[.CYL numrrer]

[,SCTR-number]

[.HEAD

nurnber

I

[,N

UM'numberl

I,BUFF-aclclress]

f

,O

numberl

[,ERREC

IOS/USER

]

i,LOG'Y/Nl I,VER-YiNl

[.CHN-acldressl

$IOED

lNamel

I

SLMSG

I TFORMAT-cod,

r l.COMrr,o,lFr

I,HALT codel [,SUBF]-cocle

[,SEV,cocle]

[,DEF-code] I,OPN0.Y/Nl

[,OPN1

-YlN]

[,OPN2-Y/Nl [,OPN3-YlNl

ITLEN-rrr:mberl

[,TADR-address ]

Norte

12

Function

Gets a record fronr a card

fiie

Gets

a record f

rom a disk

f ile via

disk data

management.

The

EBACcode

parameter

applies only to

Prograrn

Number 5704-SC2.

Gets

a record from a device

independent file.

Gets

a record from a 3741 f ile.

Gets a

record

from the CRT keyboarci.

Gets a record from a tape file

Constructs

a

get

a card

file.

then a put interfaceIO

IJrrrlds an IOB for a drsk

{rle

Eslablislres labr-.ls

tor irelds in the drsk lOB.

Gefrefat0s

loq lrst

for halt ntessage. Linkage

to 1o!l

rnay also

be generaled.

Page

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued

29 September

1978

By TN

L: G N21-5649

Maximum Num-

ber of Statements

Generated

46

1a

48

35

37

40

I Figure

30 (Part

3 of 61. Macro

Instruction Summary Charl

Macro Instruction

Summarv Chart 1 15

Page

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued 29 September 1978

By TNL: GN21-5649

Name

of Macro

lnstruction

lNamel

| $LOAD I NAME-module

name

[,FtND-address]

[,LOAD-2/address]

[,USE-R/NR]

l,PLlST-addressl

l,PACKt/Sf-

tNameJ

| $LOAD

I Ftruo-aocress

l,LoAD.Zladctressl

t,PACK-PiS]

lNamel

I St-oC I lLtst-.oor"rsl

l,opNO,addrnssl

[,OPN

1

-address

] [.OPN2-address I

$LOGD

tNamel

| $LWTO

I TLEN-numoer,

TADR.address

[,COMp

codel

[,HALT-codel

[,SUBH-code]

l,REpLy,y/Nl

I,RLEN-numberr

l,HADR.addrpssj

lNamel

| $OPEN

I IDTF-address]

INamel

| $PFKT | {coE-addressl

l,wArT.y/N

I

[,

LA B E

L-add ress]

lNamel

I SPFKY

| [COE-address]

I,ERR-6rtdressl

tNamel

| $PGS | [orF-aaaress]

[,BLANK-y/N] t,OpC

y/Nl

[,PUTDAT-address]

[,PtJTLEN-number]

[,PUTLOC-number]

[,6

9194T-address

I

[,GETLEN-numberl

l,c

ETLOC-number]

[,

EO

F-address

]

lNameJ

| $PUTC | [DEV-codej

[,DTF,address]

[,OpC-code]

[,DE

FER-Y/N] [,PR

I Nl'4-Y/N

j

t,FEED-Y/N

I [,STACKR-number]

[,PUNCH

L-number]

[,PR

INTL-number

I

[,PRHEAD-mask]

[,ERF]-addressl

tNamel

l$PUrD lf tnc-cooeJ

I

| |

| lesnc-coaeli

[,DTF-address]

[,ER

R-address]

[,EOX-address]

[,DUP-address]

[,SERR-address]

[,KERR-address]

t,UPD-Y/Nl [,LSTV-address]

[,NOKY-address]

[,HKER-address]

tt'lamel

| $eurt | [,otr-"oar.rsl I,RCAD-addressl

[,ERR-address]

[,EOX-address]

I f igur"

3O

{Part

4 of 6}. Macro Instrucrion

Summary

Charr

F unction

Finds

and loads

or loads

a

previously

found

O

module

into main

storaqe.

Generates linkagc

to svstem log.

Generates otfsets for log lisls-

Gprleraies

pdrameler

lrst tor

wr ttp

lo opcralol

or Wnte to operator wrth reply f

unctiorr.

Prepares

a prreviously

allocated file for data

transfer.

Tests

whether a program function kev that

was

allocated

by $PFKY has

been pressed.

Request allocation of a program function

key.

PUT/GET operation through CR-f data

management.

Puts

a recorcl

to a card file

Writes

a

record

on a disk f ile

via

disk data

management.

The EBACcode parameter

applies

only to

Program

Number

5704-SC2.

Puts a record to a device independent

f ile.

Maximum

Num-

trer

of Statements

Generated

41

29

14

22

66

30

6l

32

116

Name of Macro

Instruction

lNarn,.ll

$PUTp

| [DEV-codel

[,DTF-address]

t,pRtNr-y/Nl

[.SK

IPB-nunrber]

[,SPACEB-number]

f

,SKlPA'rrumberl [,SPACEA

number

]

{.ERR-addressl

[,OVFL-addressl

iNarneJl $PUTS

I IDTF-addressl

t,BLANK.Y/Ni

f

,OpC-y/Nl

[,PUTDAT-acldress]

[,PUTLOC-number]

I,PUTLEN

nurnberl

MODULE-name

I,DTF,acldressl

I,RCAD-adclressJ

t,OPC-Y/\J

[,t,ENAD-adoress]

[,ERR-acldress]

lN,rrnell $RDD i IOB-atldress,CS-address,NSECT-number

[,D

I SK-5444/5

445

13340]

lN.im"ll SRIJT I IDTF

atlrrr"ssJ

I,RCAD-addrpss,

I.DIR

ECT-FORW/BACK

I

lNarn.

I SRIT I ltOu.num. l I,CANCFL

y/Nl

INarnel

l$ROLL | [tNDEX

1i2

I

INar,e]

i

$SlT I ItOB-nanrel

t,TypE-DEC/BtN/TU/TODI

[,

ITYPE-R

EA L/WA

ITTTASK

]

lNarnel I

$SNAP I lD-hex,START-address.END-address

Puts

a record to a tape file.

F unct

ion

Putsarecordrca3-141.

Prints

a

record

via

printer

data managentent

Puts

a record

to the CRT via data manaqement

Page

of GC21

-7608-2

lssued 29 September 1978

By TNL: GN21-5649

Maximum

Num-

ber of Statements

Generated

None

31

J6

l9

21

52

Reads a record from a disk f ile via

the input/

outpul supervrsor-

Reads

a record from a tape file via

basic

tape data management.

Generates linkage to system reader-

Returns the

amount of time remaining

in a

tirne

interval.

Generates

offsets in

system

reader

parameter

I rst,

Generates system

reader

parameter

list,

buffers, and

work area.

Generates

linkage

to rollout/rollin.

This

macro

applies only to Program

Number

5704-SC1.

Sets a time interval.

Prints the specified

area of main storage

on

the system logging

device.

Generates a timer lOB.

11

10

I Figure 30

(Parr

5 of 6). Macro

Instruction

Summary Chart

Macro lnstruction Summarv

Chart 117

Pase

of GC21-7608-2

lssued

29 September

lgTg

By

TNL: GN21-5649

Name of Macro lnstruction

tNamel

| 91p11 | tO-acaress,FRoM-address,LEN-nurnber,

TRT-address

lNamej

| $WRTTI lDTF.addressl

I.RCAD-addressl

I,OPC-Y/N]

lNamell SWTT | [DTF-addressl

I,ERR-address]

[,EO

F-address

] [,EOT-address]

[,WLRS-address]

[,WLR

L--address]

tNamel

| $XCTL | runL,le

-moOute

name[,LOAD_2/address]

I,PACK-P/S]

I Fisut" 3O

(Part

6 of 6) Macro Instruction

Summary

Chart

F

unction

Returns

the

time

of day

and

the

system date

to the program.

Translates

a record

using

the

system

translate

routtne.

Builds

a

parameter

list

to pass

information

to

the

system

translate

routine.

Generates

an EBCDIC

to

ASCII

or

an ASCII

to EBCDIC

translate

table.

Waits

for completion

of a disk input/output

OPeratron.

Writes

a record

on

a disk

file

via

the input/

output

supervtsor.

Writes

a record

to a

tape

file

via

the

basic

tape data

management.

Waits f or

completion

of a basic

tape

data

managemer-tt

|

/O operation.

Finds

and loads

a module

at a

specif ied

address

and

passes

control

to it-

Maximum

Num-

ber of Statements

Generated

258

i5

19

21

43

22

118

$ALOC (allocate

space)

macro instruction 23 $PUTP

(printer

put interface)

macro instruction 34

$CHK (check

l/O completion)

macro

instruction 26 $PUTS

(put record

CRTdata management) macro

$CKL (generate

checklistl macro instruction 25 instruction 60

$CLOS

(prepare

device for termination) macro instruction 26 $PUTT (tape

put interface)

macro instruction 53

$COMN (common

equates) macro instruction 21 $RDD (read

from disk) macro instruction 46

$COEP

(generate

parameter

list

program

function key) macro $RDT (read

from tape)

macro instruction 53

instruction 61 $READ (linkage

system

reader

function) macro

$CTLT (control

command

f

or tape) macro instruction 54 instruction I

$DATE (obtain

system date) macro

instruction i9 $RlT (return

interval time) macro

instruction 20

$DTFC (card

DTF) macro instruction 2a $RLSD (system

reader

parameter

list offsets) macro

$DTFD (disk

DTF) macro

instruction 36 instruction 8

$DTFI (device-independent

DTF) macro

instruction 56 $RLST (system

reader

parameter)

macro instruction 8

$DTFK (3741 DTFI macro

instruction 48 $ROLL (rollout/rollin linkage)

macro instruclion 12

$DTFO (generate

DTF offsets)

macro

instruction 27 $SlT (set

interval timer) macro instruction 19

$DTFP (printer

DTF) macro instruction 33 $SNAP (snap

dump main storage)

macro

instruction 18

$DTFS (CRT DTF) macro instruction 58 $SOURCE

file 2

$DTFT (tape

DTF) macro instruction 49 $TIOB (timer IOB) macro

instruction 19

$EOJ (end-of-job)

macro

instruction 20 $TOD (return

time and date)

macro

instruction 20

$FIND (f

ind

directory entry) macro

instruction 13 $TRAN (interface

translate

routine) macro instruction 18

$FTCH (load

module

pass

control) macro instruction 16 $TRL (translate

parameter

list)

macro instruciion 17

$GETC (card

get

interface)

macro

instruction 30 $TRTB (translate

table)

macro

instruction 18

$GETD (disk

get

interface) macro instruction 40 $WAIT (wait

disk IDS completion)

macro instruction 47

$GETI (device-independent

get

interface) $WRTD (write

to disk) macro

instruction 47

macro instruction 57 $WRTT (write

to tape)

macro instruction 54

$GETK (3741

get

interface)

macro instruction 48 $WTT (wait

tape l/O completion)

macro

instruction 55

$GETS (get

record

from CRT/keyboard macro instruction 59 $XCTL (load

module exchange

control) macro

$GETT (tape

get

interface)

macro

instruction 52 instruction 17

$GPC

(interface

reading,

punching

and

printing

cards)

macro instruction 32

$IOBD (input/output block disk)

macro instruction 45

$f

OED (input/output block offsets)

macro instruction 46

$LMSG (parameter

list

message system logl access

method 40

macro instruction 11 allocate

program

f

unction key to a program

($PFKY) 61

$LOAD (load

module) macro instruction 13 allocate space

($ALOC) 23

$LOG (linkage

system

log) macro instruction 12 areas.

simulation 35

$LOGD (displacements

system

log) macro

instruction 12

$LWTO (parameter

list WTO

or WTOR) macro

instruction 10

$OPEN

(prepare

an l/O device) macro instruction 24 block

$PFKT (test

program

function key pressed)

macro disk input/output 106

instruction 62 input output 106

$PFKY (allocate

program

function key

to programl timer input/output 11 1

macro instruction 61 block for disk ($loBD), input/output 45

$PGS

(put/get

operation

CRT data management) macro block offsets

($IOED), input/output 46

instruction 59 buffer storage

requirements

$PUTC (card put interface) macro instruction 31 disk 37

$PUTD (disk

put interface)

macro instruction 44 tape 51

$PUTI (device-independent

put interface) macro buffers

instruction 57 double card device 29

$PUTK (3741

put interface)

macro

instruction 49 formatted 24

initialized 24

single card

device 29

bytesettings,R 111

lndex

lndex 1 19

card

($DTFC),

fite

for 2g

card

device

support 28

card

get

inrerface

($GETC) 30

card

put interface

($pUTC} 31

cards

($GPC),

printing,

punching,

and

reading

interface 32

chaini

ng

allocate

space

routine 23

ctose

routine 27

DTFs 23

open routine 24

chart,

summary,

instruction,

macro 112

check

for t/O comptetion

($CHKI 26

check

routine

operation 26

checklist

($CKL) 25

close

routine

input 26

output 26

codes,

macro

instruction

error 67

coding

conventions 1

command

for tape

($CTLT), control 54

comments 3

COMMON equates

($COMN) 27

completion

($CHK), check

for t/O 26

completion ($WAtT),

wair for disk tOS 47

completion ($WTT),

wait for tape

t/O 55

configuration,

minimum system 4

considerations,

programming 7

consrruct

a card

get

interface

($GETC) 30

construct

a

card

put interface

($PUTC) 31

construct

a device

independent

get

interface

($GETI) 57

construct

a device

independent put interface

($pUTl) Sl

construct

a disk

get

interface

($GETD) 40

construct

a disk put interface

($PUTD) 41

construct

a

printer

put interface

($pUTp) 34

construct

a tape

get

'nterface

($GETT) 32

construct

a tape

pur interface

($PUTT) 53

construct

a 3741

get

interface

($GETK) 4g

construct

a 3741 put interface

($pUTKl 49

construct

an interface

for reading, punching,

and

printing

cards

($GpC) 32

continuation

coding 3

control (gFTCH), load

a module

and

pass 16

control ($XCTL), load

a module

and exchange 17

control

blocks, f

ile 68

control

command

for tape

($CTLT) 54

CRT

($DTFS).

f

ite 58

CRT data

management

($pGS),

put get

operation b9

CRT support 58

CRI via

data

management

($PUTS),

put a record 60

CRT/keyboard 58

CRT/keyboard

($GETS),

get

a record 59

CRT/keyboard

DTF 1O2

data

areas,

main 35

data

management

($pGS),

put get

operation

through

cRT 59

data management

($PUTS), put CRT record 60

data management

interface (tape

basic)

control 54

write 54

data management

rout ines

card 30.31

CRT/keyboard 59,60

device

independent 57

disk 40,41

printer 34

tape 52,53

data

transfer,

input/output file 24

date

($DATEI, obtatn

system 19

date

($TOD), return

time and 20

date-N

is

specif

ied,

timer IOB I i.l

date-Y

is

specified,

timer IOB '111

default

value,

definition 1

define

the

file

card

($DTFC) 2A

CRT

($DTFS} 58

device

independent

($DTFI) 56

disk

($DTFD) 36

file

sharing 39

multivolume 52

printer (gDTFPl 33

tape

(SDTFT) 49

3741 ($DTFKI 48

define

the

file control blocks 6g

deleting

macro

instructions 4

device

(SOPEN),

prepare

l/O 24

device

independent

DTF 97

device

independent get

interface

($GETI) 57

device

allocation 24

device

independenr

($DTFI), file 56

device

independenr put interface

($pUTl) 57

device

independent

support S6

device

support

card 28

CRT/keyboard 58

device-independent 56

d isk 35

general 22

printer 33

rape 49

37 4't zl8

device

rermination

($CLOS},

prepare 26

devices

supported 4

devices,

input and output 4

directory

entry

(gFlNDl,

f

ind 13

disk

($DTFD).

fite 36

disk

($IOBD),

input/output

block 45

disk ($RDD), read 46

disk

($WRTD),

write 47

disk

buffer storage

requirements 37

disk data management

interface, updating a record

disk

data management

modules,

list 42.43

41

120

disk device

support 35 f ile

control blocks,

def ine 68

disk DTF (5704-SC1

onlyl 79 fite,

define (see

define

the fite)

disk DTF (5704-SC2

onty) 86 find (form l), toad 13

disk

get

interface

($GETD) 40 f

ind a directory entry (gF

IND) 13

disk input/output block 106 find parameter

list after load execution 15

disk input/output supervisor interface 45 find parameter

list

description 14

disk IOB format 107 format of timer IOB

disk IOS

completion

($WAIT), wait 47 DATE-N soecif ied 111

disk

put interface

($PUTD) 44 DATE-Y specif ied 111

disk routines format,

disk IOB 1O7

get 40 function ($READ), tinkage

to system

reader g

put 4'l function key pressed

($PFKT), test for program 62

read 46 function key request

($COEP),

parameter

list

for program 61

wait 47 function key support,

program 61

write 47 f

unction key to a program

($PFKY),

allocate

program 61

disk,

update 41

displacements

for system los ($LOGD) '12

display

support 58

DTF

card 2A general

l/O support 22

CRT/keyboard 58 general

SCP support 12

device-independent 56 generate

a checklist

($CKL) 25

disk 36 generate

a parameter

list

printer 33 message

on system

log

($LMSG) 11

tape 49 program

function key request

($COEP) 61

DTF def ined wTo or wToR ($LWTO) 10

field contents 27 generate

a put/get

operation

through CRT data

management

field lengths 27 ($pGS) 59

labels 27 generate

a system

reader

parameter

list

($RLST) 8

offsets 27 generate

a translate parameter list {$TR L} 17

post-open 24 generate

a translate

table ($TRTB) 18

pre'open 24 generate

an interface to the translate

routine ($TRAN) 18

DTF descriptions generate

displacements

for system

los ($LOGD) 12

CRT/keyboard 1O2 generate

DTF offsets

($DTFO) 27

device-independent 97 generate

equates 27

disk (5704-SC1

only) 79 generate

program

fundion key request 61

disk (5704-SC2

only) 86 generate

the linkage to rhe system

loS

($LOG) 12

general 68 generate

timer IOB ($TIOB) 19

line

printer 75 get

MFCM 71 card 30

MFCU 69 CRT/keyboard 59

tape 93 device-independent s7

1442 73 disk 40

2501 77 tape 52

3741 1O4 3741 I

DTF get a record from the CRT/keyboard ($GETS) 59

chaining 23 get

input operation through CRT data

management

($PGS) 59

checklist 25

dump main

storage

($SNAP),

snap 18

halt/syslog routine 23

end-of-job

($EOF) 20

entry

($FIND),

find

directory 13

eq uales

generate 27

labels I

system reader

parameter list 8

equates

($COMN),

COMMON 27

error codes, macro instruction 67

error information 67

exchange control {$SCTL},

load module

and 17

lndex 121

f

/O completion

($CHK),

cnecr 26

l/O completion

($WTTI,

wait for tape Ss

l/O device

($OpEN),

prepare 24

f/O support, general 22

information,

error 67

input

devices

supported 4

input/output hlock

disk 1Oo

tin-ler 111

input/output

block for

disk

($IOBD) 45

input/output btock

offsets

($IOED) 46

anput/outputblocks 106

input/output supervisor

interface

(disk)

wait 47

write 47

input/outputsupport 22

Input

close routine 26

open

routine 24

i

nstruct

io

ns

delete

macro 4

macro

(list

of

) 5

wrating

rnacro 1

i

nterface

card get 30

card

put 31

device

independent

get E7

device

independent

put 57

disk

get 40

disk

put 4'l

printer

put 34

reading, punching,

and

printing

cards 32

tape

get 52

rape

put 53

translate

routine 1

B

3741 get 48

3741

put 49

lnterrupt

program 1Z

interval

time

($RlT),

return 20

Interval

timer

($SlT),

set 1g

roB

forrnatted 24

printer 33

tape 50

timer,

build l9

description 1 1 1

formar 111

lOB,

disk

build 45

description 106

storagerequirements

37

IOS

(input/output

supervisor)

routines

write 47

job end 20

iob termination,

device 26

key pressed,

test for program

function 62

Key

request, parameter

list for program

function 61

key support,

program

function 61

Key

to program,

allocate

program

f

unction 61

keywords 1

label

restrict

ions

duplicate

labels 12

use

of $ symbol 7

warning 27

labels

disk lOBs 46

equates 8

line

prinrer

DTF 75

linkage

to the system

log 12

linkage

to system

reader

f

unction ($READ) g

linkage,

rotlout/roilin ($ROLL) 2

list

descript

ion

find parameter 14

load

parameter l6

parameter

find after load

execution 15

message

on system

log 11

program

function key request 61

system

reader

offsets g

translate 17

WTO or WTOR 10

system

reader parameter B

load

a module

and

exchange

control ($XCTL) 17

load

a module

and

pass

control ($FTCH) l6

load

a module

($LOAD) 13

load

onty

(form

ll) l6

load

parameter

list

description 16

load

with f

ind

(form

l) 13

tog

def

inition g

linkage

to the

system 12

parameter

list for message

on system 11

log

support,

system g

log,

displacements

for system 12

I l2

rr)achirfe

confiquration 4 macro instruction

(continued)

macro instruction $TIOB (timer

IOBI 19

$A

LOC

lallocate

space) 23 $TOD (return

time and

date) 20

$Ct-lK

(checi<

l/O

completlon) 26 $TRAN (interface

translate

routine) 18

$CKL (generate

checklist) 25 $TR

L (translate

parameter

list) 17

$CLOS

(prepare

clevice

for terrnination) 26 $TRTB (translate

table) 18

$C(.)N4l\

(COtvllMON

equares) 21 $WAIT (wait

disk IDS completion) 47

$COEP

(gererate

pararneter

list

program

f

r.rnction

key) 61 $WRTD (write

to disk) 47

$CTL'I (control

cornmand

for tape) 54 $WRTT (write

to tape) 54

$DATE (obtain

system

date) 19 $WTT (wait

tape liO completion) 55

$DTFC (card

DTF) 28 $XCTL (load

module exchange conrrol) '17

$DTFD (disk

DTF) 36 macro instruction

statements

(see

chapter

2l

$DTFI (device

independent DTF) 56 macro instructions

$DTFK (3741

Dl-F) 48 coding 1

$D

f FO (generate

DTF oifsets) 27 def initions 1

$DTFP

(printer

DTF) 33 deleting 4

$DTFS

(CRT

DTF) 58 error

codes 61

$llTFT (tape

Dl'F) 49 list of 5

$EOJ (errd'of-job) 20 sample

program 66

$FIND (find

directory entry) 13 summary chart 111

$FTCH (load

rnociule

pass

control) 16 macro

processor

$GETC

(card

qet

interface) 30 overview 2

$GEf D (dist<

get

interface) 40 register usage 7

$GETI (device-independent

get

interface) 5l residence 4

$GETK (3741

get

interface) 48 restrictions 7

$GEI

S

(get

recor.l f ronr

CRT/kcyboardl 59 main

data

areas 35

$GETT

(tape

get

rrrteriace)

52 main

storage

($SNAP),

dump, snap 18

$GPC

(interface

reading,

punching,

and

printing

cardsl 32 message

on system

log,

parameter

list

tor 1

1

$IOBD

(input/ourprut

block disk) 45 MFCM DTF 11

$IOED

(input/output

block offsets) 46 MFCU DTF 69

$LMSG {parameter

list message

system

log) 11 minimum system configuration 4

$L.OAD

(load

modulei 13 Model

15

translate

routine 17

$LOG (linkage

system log) 12 module

($LOADI,

load a 13

$LOGD (displacements

system log) 12 module and exchange control

($XCTL),

load

a 17

$LWTO

(paramerer

list WTO or

WTOR) 10 moduleand

pass

control

($FTCH),load

a 16

$OPEN

(prepare

an l/O device) 24 multivolume f ile support 52

$PFKT

(test

program

lunction

key

pressed) 62

$PFKY (allocate

program

function

key

to program) 61

$PGS

{put/get operation CRT data managernent) 59

$PLJfC

(card

put interface) 31

$PUTD (disk put interface) 44 narne f

ield, description 1

$PU-fl

{device

indeperrdent

put

interlace) 5-7

$PUIK (3741

put

ilrterface) 49

$PU-IP

(pr

irlter

pul interface) 34

$PUTS

(put record

CRT data

managernent) 60

$PUTT

(tape

put interface) 53 obtairr system

date

($DATEI 19

$RDD {read

trorn

disk) 46 OCL

for macro

processor 63

$RDT (read

from tape) 53 offsets

$R

EAD (linkage

systern reader

tunction) I device and access

methods 27

$R

lT (return

interval

time) 20 disk 41

$R

LSD (system

reader

parameter

list offsets) 8 system

log

parameter

list 10,12

$R

LST (system

reader

parameter) 8 open routine

$ROLL-

(rollout/rollrn

linkage) 12 input 24

$Sl

I (set

intervar rimer) 19 output ?.4

$SNAP

(snap

clurrrp main storage) 18 operand 1

operation

code 1

0oerat ioll

check

routine 26

translate

routine 11

option 1

outPut

close

routine 26

open

routine 24

or-rtput devices, supported 4

Index 123

pack,

system 4

parameter

list

f

ind macro 13

load

description 16

log

and/or

message

to operator 11

program

function key 61

support

system

log 10

system

tog

message 11

system

tog

WTO 10

system reader 8

translate

routine 17

wnte to operator 10

pass

control

($FTCH),

load

a

module

and l6

prepare

a device for termination ($CLOSI 26

prepare

an l/O device

($OpEN) 24

pnnter data

management

interface 34

printer DTF description 75

pnnter support 33

processor,

macro

($MPXDV) 2

program

control

exchange 17

pass 1

6

program

function key

multiple usage 62

parameter

list 61

request 61

support 61

test 62

program,

sample 63

programmrng

considerations 7

put

card 31

CRT/keyboard 60

device-independent 51

disk 41

printer 34

tape 53

3741 49

put a record

to the CRT via

data

management

($pUTS) 60

O-byte 46

R-byte

settings 111

reaO

card

($GpC) 32

disk

($RDD) 46

tape

(gRDT) S3

reader

support,

system 8

record

length

device-independent 56

tape 50

register

usage 7

residence

of macro

processor 4

restrict

io ns

atlocate

space 23

labels

(see

label

restrictions)

macro

processor 7

main

data

areas 35

rollout 12

srmulation

areas 35

telecommunications

23

return

codes,

system

reader function 8, 9

return

intervaltime

($RlT) 20

return

time and

dare

($TOD) 20

rollout

routine 12

rollout/rollin

linkage

(gRDLL) 12

routines,

data

management

card 30,31

CRT/keyboard 59

device

independent 57

disk 40,41

printer 34

tape 52,53

tape-basic 53,54

sample

program 63

macro

instructions

used 66

ocl 63

purpose

of the 63

termanation 63

SCP -]

SCP

support,

general 12

set intervaltimer

($SlT) 19

simulation

areas 35

snap

dump

main

storage

($SNAP) 1g

starement,

ocL 62

supported

devices 4

system

configuration,

minimum 4

system

control program

(see

SCp)

system

date 1

9

system

Input

devices 4

system

log

support I

system

pack 4

system

reader

devices 8

f

unct

ion 9

parameter

Iist 8

parameter

list

offsers

($RLSD) 8

support 8

system

servrces

macros j

124

tape

data

management

interface

control

commands 54

get 52

pur 53

write 54

tape

data

management

routines 52

tape

data

management

routines

(basic) S3

table

of extents.

disk 37

table,

translate 17

tape

buffer storage

requirements 50

tape

device

support 49

tape

routines

control 54

get 52

put 53

wa

it 55

write 54

terminate

device 2a

test

for program

function key pressed ($pFKT)

time and

date,

return 20

timer

IOB

(see

IOB)

timer,

setting 19

translate

paramerer

list

($TRL) 17

translate

routine

operation 17

translate

table 17

wart

d

isk 47

tape 55

wait for disk IOS

completion 47

wait for tape

l/O comptetion

($WTT) 5

write to

disk

($WRTD) 47

operator

($LWTO) 10

tape

($WRTT) 54

62

lndex 125

aal Technical

Newsletter

I

BM

Corporation, Pu

bl

ications,

Departm ent 245,

R ochester,

Minnesota 55901

OIBM

Corp.

1978

This

Newsletter

No. GN21-5649

Date 29

September 1978

Base

Pubf ication

No. GC21-76O8-2

File No. 53-36

Previous Newsletters

None

IBM System/3

Model 15

System

Control Programming

Macros

Reference

Manual

O IBM

Corp.

1973,1975,1976

This

technical

newsletter,

a

part

of version

03, modification

00 of IBM

System/3 Model 15

System

Control

Program

Number

5704-SC2

(and

also

applicable to version

06, modification

00 of IBM

System/3Model

|5SystemControl

ProgramNumber5704-SC1),providesreplacementpagesforthe

subject

publication.

These

replacement

pages

remain in

effect for subsequent

versions

and modifications

unless

specifically

altered. Pages

to be

inserted

and/or removed

are:

Cover,

edition

notice

21, 22

27,28

37

through 44

57,58

61, 62

87

through 90

111, 112

1 12.1

, 112.2

(addedl

1

13 through 1 18

Changes

to text and illustrations

are indicated

by a

vertical

line

at the left

of the change.

Summary

of Amendments

. Miscellaneous

technical

chanoes

y'y'ote.'

Please

f ile

this cover

letter

at the back

of tlre manual

to provide

a record

of changes.

Pnnted in

U.S.A.

=:== /

t

T

@/

/

Technical

Newsletter

lBl\!

Corporation, Publications,

Department

245, Rochester,

Minnesota SS901

O IBM

Corp. 1980

This Newsletter No.

Date

GN21

5700

28 March

1980

Base

Pubf ication No. GC21-7608'2

Fite No. s3_36

IBM

System/3

Modet

15

System

Control

Programming

Macros

Reference

Manual

O IBM

Corp. 1913,

1915.

1916

This

technical

newsletter

applies

to version

8,

modification

0 of the IBM System/3

Model

15 System

Control Programming

Macros

and

provides

replacement

pages

for the

subject

publication.

These

replacement

pages

remain

in

effect for subsequent

versions

and modifications

unless

specificallv

altered

Pages

to be inserted

and/or removed

are:

7.8

35,

36

45

through

48

Changes

to text and illustrations

are indicated

by a

vertical

line

at the left

of the

chanqe.

Summary

of Amendments

Miscellaneous

technical

chanqes

y't/ote.'

Please

file this cover

letter

at the back

of the manual

to provide

a record

of changes.

Printed in

U.S.A.

{6'r Technical

Newsletter This Newsletter No. GN21-5720

Date 26

September

1980

Base

Pubf ication

No. GC21-52O7-1

Fite No. 53-34

PreviousNewsletters

None

IBM System/3

Model

15D

System

Measurement

Facility

Reference

and

Logic

Manual

OIBM

Corp. 1978.

1979

This

technical

newsletter

applies

to the current version

and modification of the applicable

System/3

program

listed

in the edition notice

and provides

replacement

pages

for the subject

publication.

These

replacement

pages

remain

in effect for subsequent

versions

and modifications unless

specifically

altered. Pages

to be inserted

andlor removed

are:

1-5, 1-6

Changes

to text and illustrations

are

indicated

by a vertical

line

at the

left

of the change.

Summary

of Amendments

Change to PERMANENT

DISK ERROR

message.

lVote.' Please

file this cover letter

at the back

of the manual

to provide

a record

of changes.

IBM

Corporation,

Publications,

Department

245,

Rochester,

Minnesota

55901

O IBM Corp. 1980 printed

in

U.S.A.

GC21-7608-2

E=F=€

International

Business Machines Corporation

General

Systems Division

5775D Glenridge Drive N.E.

Atlanta, Georgia

30301

(USA

Only)

General Business

Group

/ International

44 South

Broadway

White

Plains,

New

York 10601

u.

s. A.

'ion'rl

00

CI'

J

(^)

11

o

z

;

(,

(.)

o)

'o

:.

='

c

'U,

o

N

J

o)

o

@

N

GC21-7608-2

?

z

IBM System/3

Model

15

System

Control

Programming

Macros

Reference

o

!

;

a

o{

EU,

AJ

!

o.:

,F

=-

oa

E}

-6

FO

I

::

o\

€:

o

.2

a

=

o

E 3t:

E -o>>

nPen

I' g

E€

! 3">

* d:Y

E;

m:;7

;; €sfi

6.o €:;

Y',Lll=C

EE A3F

-":i

fs;

=a v c

Fh cFa

*; Ef

p

>; E;:

=o i?:3 t

eE oE:"P

= EE

:Eg€

F

5 l: 5*a:

s

,. 9E !€i3

i 9.e

EstE

I

E :; irSi

s

= ia t::3 :

8 €:

E;ng

$

a FE

EiEi

c "iF :Go=

ttt 9^fr,

o ;!

LlJ

E €=

o:

s9

>

o^;

cv=

:-

EE o

ell Z

8F

*. C

Lx

E; :

o-- Y

L=

9:

-O.:

56 H

Ea i;

.9: f

!F =

:€

o..9 6

>; .9

Ea :-

€E F

':6 X 6

;€ 3' ,i

ET

E

E€ 6 b

:- ,9 I

;; E \

f i e :

;E .! g

3,; b {

flg 'i

.{s

o.6

I

o

,

E

l

T

l

o

I

Fold I

I

GC21-7608-2

Fold

FIRST

CLASS

PERMIT NO. 387

ROCHESTER, MINN.

I

r6

r<

lut

l(D

t\

lo)

r1

to

,z

I9

ct

iP

l(,

'cD

I

-

-I

--

-

-I

-

BUSINESS REPLY

MAIL

NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES

POSIAGE WIIT 8E PAID BY

IBM

Corporation

General Systems

Division

Development

La boratory

Publications, Dept. 245

Rochester, Minnesota 55901

Fold

In'ternational Business

Machines

Corporation

Gelneral

Systems Division

5775D Glenridge Drive N.E.

Atlanta, Georgia 30301

(USA

Only)

Gelneral Business Group

/ International

44 South

Broadway

White Plains, New

York 10601

u.

s.

A.

(

| nternational

)

!

d

t-

IF

(t,

IP

I

r6)

'O

t\

trI

l6)

o

,@

IN

I

Fold

GC21-7608-2

IBM

System/3

Modet

15

System

Control

Programming

Macros

Reference

o

P

llE

r-r 2

o

l

@

.2

o

=

J

o

.E 9a-

tr Jc X

E 6>>

o P$-o

F 3 E€

Y Ru;

g-LY

*o:

e-

m::-

=.Y ;69

cE

-:E

3

0 !:;

:,-lt=c

EA A3F

:.; fs;

7o s c

Fh l-tr-

?c cO!L

ie1 .9:E'

>i E;:

(D-n E

oe; E

:* 'Pt':i "

= :E :fi€E F

5 i: 5*aE

I

l! of ll=>6

-;=:P=o

F?^.,3ogF

2 9E 'E.E':E

F

uJ o- r I o -

<-o.:c

E 3a

t:33

a

I ts

F;sg

$

? FE EiEi

oc ,;E :]i6.,s

rrJ :X

o ;!

ur =-

E €=

o=

o:

s9

j

Fv d

:*

t; o

-i z

8F

=.=

F1' F

LX

6-=

L=

9.:

:6c

66 E

8e'E

JO

q,.9 6

>; .9

=E 4

EO H

€E F'

':6 X 6

E:E } .\

>lt

=O

b: .9

P\

;; .e i

;; E \

q@3-a

E* o <

:F .g P.

g;. 6 {

eri ,i

8d

o-6

j

;

o

o{

Ecri

QJ

E

o.:

f,!

=-

=>

E9

vG

i,jo

iz

lo

I

-

l

T

o

I

GC21-7608-2

FIRST

C!"ASS

PERMIT

NO. 387

ROCHESTER,

MINN.

I

t-

r@

r3

ta

t4

t\

| (.)

,3

t-

to

,z

I9

(t

i?

l(,

' ct)

I

BUSINESS

REPLY MAIL

NO POSTAGE

STAMP NECESSAFY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES

POSTAGE

WII.I.

8E PAID

BY

IBM

Corporation

General

Systems Division

Develop

ment

La boratory

Publications,

Dept.

245

Rochester,

Minnesota

55901

-

TI

r-

-

I-I

r-

III

II

I-

rEI

-

Fold

EE-==-

-;:=: =

International

Business

Machines

Corporation

General

Systems

Division

5775D

Glenridge Drive

N.E.

Atlanta,

Georgia

30301

(USA

Only)

General

Business Group

/ lnternational

44 South Broadway

White Plains,

New

York 10601

u. s. A.

(

| nternational

I

!

(D

l=

t-

?

t>

t!

I

ro

,o

lN

rtr

o

,@

IN

I

GC21 7608 2_System3_15_SCP_macros_reference_manual_Mar80 2 System3 15 SCP Macros Reference Manual Mar80

GC21-7608-2_System3_15_SCP_macros_reference_manual_Mar80 manual pdf -FilePursuit

GC21-7608-2_System3_15_SCP_macros_reference_manual_Mar80 GC21-7608-2_System3_15_SCP_macros_reference_manual_Mar80

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation